Variador Schenider-Inverter - en PDF

Variable speed drives
Altivar 31
High performance
instinctively!
Catalogue
October
03
For 3-phase asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW

Contents Variable speed drives
for asynchronous motors
Altivar 31
b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 2 to 9
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .pages 10 to 13
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 14 to 17
b Options
v Braking resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 18 and 19
v Line chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 20 and 21
v Additional EMC input filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 22 and 23
v Output filters and motor chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 24 and 25
v Communication options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 26 and 27
b PowerSuite software workshop. . . . . . . . . . . pages 28 and 29
b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 30 and 35
b Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36 and 37
b Mounting and installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 38 and 39
b Combinations for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . pages 40 to 43
b Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 44 to 59
b Schneider Electric worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 60 to 65
1
Presentation 0
for asynchronous motors 0
Altivar 31
ESC
ENT
stop
reset
FWO
RUN
REV
3
2 4
1
2
Presentation (continued) 0
Altivar 31
Applications
The Altivar 31 drive is a frequency inverter for 3-phase squirrel cage asynchronous
motors. The Altivar 31 is robust, compact, easy to use and conforms to EN 50178,
IEC/EN 61800-2, IEC/EN 61800-3 standards, UL/CSA certification and to
e marking.
It incorporates functions that are suitable for the most common applications,
including:
b Materials handling (small conveyors, hoists, etc),
b Packing and packaging machines,
b Specialist machines (mixers, kneaders, textile machines, etc.),
b Pumps, compressors, fans.
Altivar 31 drives communicate on Modbus and CANopen industrial buses. These two
protocols are integrated as standard into the drive.
Altivar 31 drives are supplied with a heatsink for normal environments and ventilated
enclosures. Multiple units can be mounted side by side 3 to save space.
Drives are available for motor ratings between 0.18 kW and 15 kW, with four types
of power supply:
b 200 V to 240 V single phase, 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW
b 200 V to 240 V 3-phase, 0.18 kW to 15 kW
Altivar 31 drives are available with a choice of two different human-machine

interfaces:
b 1 ATV 31Hpppp with displays and menu navigation keys
b 2 ATV 31HppppA with displays, menu navigation keys and local control (Run/Stop
and speed reference set by a potentiometer).
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31HppM2
and ATV 31HppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an
economical means of meeting e marking requirements.
ATV 31HppM3X and ATV 31HppS6X drives are available without EMC filter. Filters
are available as an option for customer assembly, if conformity to EMC standards is
required.
Functions
The Altivar 31 drive has six logic inputs, three analog inputs, one logic/analog output
and two relay outputs.
The main functions integrated in the drive are as follows:
b Motor and drive protection
b Linear, S, U and customised acceleration and deceleration ramps
b +/- speed
b 16 preset speeds
b PI references and regulator
b 2-wire/3-wire control
b Brake sequence
b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection and automatic restart
b Fault configuration and stop type configuration
b Saving the configuration in the drive
Several functions can be assigned to one logic input.
Options and accessories

The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 31 drive:
b Braking resistors
b Line chokes
b EMC radio interference input filters and output filters
b Plates for mounting on 5 rail
b UL Type 1 conformity kit
b Adaptor plate for replacing an Altivar 28 drive
Various dialogue and communication options 4, 5, 6, 7 can be used with the drive,
see pages 7 and 8.
Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

pages 10 to 13 pages 14 to 17 pages 30 to 35 pages 36 to 39 pages 44 to 59
3
Presentation 0
Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
ESC
ENT
stop
reset
FWO
RUN
REV
3
1
4
Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
Applications
The enclosed Altivar 31 drive is suitable for applications requiring:
- IP 55 degree of protection in a hostile environment
- a drive that is ready for use in a motor starter
Once it has been customised, the enclosure can be installed next to the motor.
Enclosed drives are available in power ratings from 0.18 kW to 4 kW.
There are two types of power supply:
b 200 V to 240 V single phase, 0.18 kW and 2.2 kW
b 380 V to 500 V 3-phase, 0.37 kW and 4 kW
Customisable enclosed drive

This range allows full customisation of the human-machine interface of an enclosure.
The IP 55 enclosure includes:
b a drive with external heatsink
8 b removable covers for installation of the following components:
7 Vario switch disconnector or GV2 circuit-breaker
8 3 buttons and/or LEDs with plastic flange Ø 22, and 1 speed reference
potentiometer
9 button for the RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable
10 cable glands for cable routing
The combinations (drive, circuit-breaker, contactor) required for the motor starter
function can be found on pages 40 and 41.
Example references:
7 - 3-pole Vario switch disconnector (Vpp + KCp 1pZ)
- Selector switch with 3 fixed positions XB5 D33
- LED XB5 AVpp
- 2.2 kOhm potentiometer
These references can be found in our specialist catalogues.
All components must be ordered separately and wired by the customer.
9
The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31CppM2
and ATV 31CppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an
economical means of meeting e marking requirements.
10
The following options and accessories can be used with the enclosed Altivar 31
drive:
b Braking resistors
b Line chokes
b RJ45 connector with IP 55 cable
Various dialogue and communication options 2, 3, 4, 5 can be used with the drive,
see pages 7 and 8.

5
Presentation 0
Altivar 31
Drive kit
4 3 2 5
ESC
ENT
stop
reset
FWO
RUN
REV
2
10
11
12
8 7 4 3 6
6
Altivar 31
Drive kit
Applications
The drive kit is a new addition to the Altivar 31 drives range.
The drive kit comprises:
b Altivar 31 drive elements (heatsink, power and control subassemblies)
b EMC filter
b Mechanical fittings
b Seals required for use in difficult environments (IP 55)
The kit is mounted on a metal fixing support with no flange or protective cover.
The Altivar 31 drive kit can be built into a floor-standing or wall-mounted enclosure
or a machine frame.
The drive kit is available for power ratings from 0.18 kW to 15 kW.
There are two types of power supply:
b 200 V to 240 V single phase, 0.18 kW to 2.2 kW

The incorporation of level A EMC filters (conducted and radiated) in ATV 31KppM2
and ATV 31KppN4 drives simplifies the installation of machines and provides an
economical means of meeting e marking requirements. The drives have been sized
to conform to the following standards: IEC/EN61800-3, domestic and industrial
environments.
Description
b Drive kit for power ratings y 4 kW 1

The Altivar 31 drive components (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) are
fixed by mechanical adaptors 2 and protective fittings.
The unit is supported by a metal plate 3 fixed to the heatsink.
The plate is sealed on all sides.
Once the support has been cut out, the drive kit is fixed to the base of the floor-
standing or wall-mounted enclosure by means of this plate.
The power terminals 5 are protected (IP 20).
b Drive kit for power ratings u 5.5 kW 6

The Altivar 31 drive components (heatsink, power and control subassemblies) are
fixed by mechanical adaptors 2 and protective fittings.
The metal support plate 3 for the components is fitted with brackets 8 for mounting
in a floor-standing or wall-mounted enclosure.
The plate is sealed on all sides 4.
Two fans are fitted behind the plate under the heatsink.
Additional fixing holes 7 are provided for component mounting (GV2 circuit-breaker,
Vario switch disconnector, additional plate, etc.).
Drive kits are supplied with:

b A drilling and cutting template to assist with installation
b A user’s manual with installation instructions and safety precautions.

The following options and accessories can be used with the Altivar 31 drive kit:
b Braking resistors
b Line chokes
Various dialogue and communication options 9, 10, 11, 12 can be used with the
drive, see pages 7 and 8.

7
Presentation 0
Altivar 31
Dialogue options
The Altivar 31 drive communicates with the following options:

b Remote terminal
b PowerSuite software workshop
b Ethernet/Modbus bridge
b Communication gateways
The communication function provides access to the drive’s configuration,

adjustment, control and signalling functions.
Remote terminal
The Altivar 31 can be connected to a remote terminal.

The remote terminal can be mounted on the door of an enclosure with IP 65 protection
on the front panel.
The terminal provides access to the same functions as the display and integral keys
on the drive (see page 45).
It can be used:
b to control, adjust and configure the drive remotely
b for visible remote signalling
b to save and download configurations (4 configuration files can be saved)
Description
563220
1 Display
v Four 7-segment displays visible at 5 m
v Displays numeric values and codes
v The display flashes when a value is stored.
1
v The display flashes to indicate a fault on the drive.
ESC
2 Use of keys:
v Navigation arrows and ENT, ESC for settings and configurations
ENT 2 v FWD/REV key: reverses the direction of rotation of the motor
stop
reset v RUN key: motor run command
RUN
FWO
REV
v STOP/RESET key: motor stop command or drive fault reset

8
Presentation 0
Altivar 31
Communication options
PowerSuite software workshop

563019
PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions offer the following advantages:

b Display messages in plain text and multiple languages
b Prepare work in design office without connecting the Altivar to the PC
b Save configurations and settings to floppy disk or hard disk and download them to
the drive
b Print out settings
b Read and import Altivar 28 files into the Altivar 31.
See pages 28 and 29.
Ethernet/Modbus bridge
The Altivar 31 can be connected to an Ethernet network via an Ethernet/Modbus
563016
bridge.
Ethernet communication is primarily intended for the following applications:
b Coordination between PLCs
b Local or centralised supervision
b Communication with production management software
174 CEV 300 10 b Communication with remote I/O
b Communication with industrial control products
Communication gateways
The Altivar 31 can connect to other communication buses by means of the following
gateways:
563017
b Fipio/Modbus,
b DeviceNet/Modbus
b Profibus DP/Modbus
LUF P1
563018
LA9 P307

9
Characteristics 0
Altivar 31
Environment
Conformity to standards Altivar 31 drives have been developed to conform to the strictest international
standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial control devices
(IEC, EN), in particular:
low-voltage EN 50178, EMC immunity and EMC conducted and radiated emissions.
EMC immunity b IEC/EN 61000-4-2 level 3
b IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3
b IEC/EN 61000-4-4 level 4
b IEC/EN 61000-4-5 level 3 (power access)
b IEC/EN 61800-3, environments 1 and 2
EMC conducted and radiated emissions for drives
All b IEC/EN 61800-3, environments: 2 (industrial supply) and 1 (public supply)
restricted distribution
ATV 31H018M2...HU15M2, b EN 55011 class A group 1, EN 61800-3 category C2
ATV 31C018M2...CU15M2, With additional EMC filter:
ATV 31H037N4...HU40N4, b EN 55022 class B group 1, EN 61800-3 category C1
ATV 31C037N4...CU40N4
ATV 31HU22M2, ATV 31CU22M2, b EN 55011 class A group 2, EN 61800-3 category C3
ATV 31HU55N4...HD15N4. With additional EMC filter (1):
b EN 55022 class A group 1, EN 61800-3 category C2
b EN 55022 class B group 1, EN 61800-3 category C1
ATV 31H018M3X...HD15M3X, With additional EMC filter (1):
ATV 31H075S6X....HD15S6X b EN 55011 class A group 1, EN 61800-3 category C2
b EN 55022 class B group 1, EN 61800-3 category C1
e marking The drives bear e marking in accordance with the European low voltage (73/23/EEC
and 93/68/EEC) and EMC (89/336/EEC) directives
Product certification UL, CSA, NOM 117 and C-Tick
Degree of protection ATV 31HpppM2, ATV 31HpppN4, b IP 31 and IP 41 on upper part and IP 21 on connection terminals
ATV 31HpppM3X, ATV 31HpppS6X b IP 20 without cover plate on upper part of cover
ATV 31CpppM2, ATV 31CpppN4 b IP 55
Degree of pollution 2
Climatic treatment TC
Vibration resistance Drive without 5 rail option Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6: 1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz, 1 gn from 13
to 150 Hz
Shock resistance 15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Relative humidity % 5…95 without condensation or dripping water, conforming to IEC 60068-2-3
Ambient temperature Storage °C - 25…+ 70
around the unit Operation
ATV 31Hppp °C - 10…+ 50 without derating, with protective cover on top of the drive
- 10…+ 60 with derating, without protective cover on top of the drive (see derating
curves, page 36)
ATV 31Cppp, °C - 10…+ 40 without derating
ATV 31Kppp
Maximum operating altitude m 1000 without derating (above this, derate the current by 1% per additional 100 m)
Operating position
Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical
mounting position
Drive characteristics
Output frequency range Hz 0…500
Switching frequency kHz 2…16 adjustable during operation
Speed range 1…50
Transient overtorque 170-200% of nominal motor torque (typical value)
Braking torque With braking resistor 100% of nominal motor torque continuously and up to 150% for 60 s
Without braking resistor Value of nominal motor torque (typical value) according to ratings:
30% for > ATV 31pU15pp
50% for y ATV 31pU15pp
100% for y ATV 31p075pp
150% for y ATV 31p018M2
Maximum transient current 150% of the nominal drive current for 60 seconds (typical value)
Voltage/frequency ratio Sensorless flux vector control with PWM (pulse width modulation) type motor control
signal.
Factory-set for most constant torque applications.
Possible options: specific ratios for pumps and fans, energy saving or constant torque
U/f for special motors.
Frequency loop gain Factory-set with the speed loop stability and gain
Possible options for machines with high resistive torque or high inertia, or for machines
with fast cycles.
Slip compensation Automatic whatever the load. Can be suppressed or adjusted.
(1) See table on page 23 to check authorised cable lengths
Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

10
Characteristics (continued) 0
Altivar 31
Electrical characteristics
Power supply Voltage V 200 - 15% to 240 + 10% single phase for ATV 31ppppM2p
200 - 15% to 240 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppM3X
380 - 15% to 500 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppN4p
525 - 15% to 600 + 10% 3-phase for ATV 31ppppS6X
Frequency Hz 50 - 5% to 60 + 5%
Prospective short-circuit For drives

current ICC ATV 31ppppM2 A ≤ 1000 (ICC at connection point) for single phase power supply
ATV 31H018M3X...HU40M3X, A ≤ 5000 (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply
ATV 31p037N4...pU40N4,
ATV 31H075S6X...HU40S6X
ATV 31HU55M3X...HD15M3X, A ≤ 22000 (ICC at connection point) for 3-phase power supply
ATV 31HU55N4...HD15N4,
ATV 31KU55N4...KD15N4,
ATV 31HU55S6X...HD15S6X
Output voltage Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage.
Maximum connection capacity For drives
and tightening torque of the ATV 31H018M2...H075M2, 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
power supply terminals, motor, ATV 31H018M3X...HU15M3X 0.8 Nm
braking module and DC bus
ATV 31HU11M2...HU22M2, 6 mm2 (AWG 10)
ATV 31HU22M3X...HU40M3X, 1.2 Nm
ATV 31H037N4...HU40N4,
ATV 31H075S6X...HU40S6X
ATV 31HU55M3X, HU75M3X, 16 mm2 (AWG 6)
ATV 31HU55N4, HU75N4, 2.2 Nm
ATV 31HU55S6X, HU75S6X
ATV 31HD11M3X, HD15M3X, 25 mm2 (AWG 3)
ATV 31HD11N4, HD15N4, 4 Nm
ATV 31HD11S6X, HD15S6X
Electrical isolation Electrical isolation between power and control (inputs, outputs, power supplies)
Internal supplies available Short-circuit and overload protection:
- One +10 V (0/+ 8%) supply for the reference potentiometer (2.2 to 10 kΩ), maximum
current 10 mA
- One + 24 V supply (min. 19 V, max. 30 V) for logic inputs, maximum current 100 mA
Configurable analog inputs 3 configurable analog inputs AI1, AI2, AI3.
b AI1: analog voltage input 0 to +10V, impedance 30 kΩ (maximum safe voltage
30 V)
b AI2: analog bipolar voltage input ±10 V, impedance 30 kΩ (maximum safe voltage
30 V)
b AI3: analog current input X-Y mA by programming X and Y from 0 to 20 mA, with
impedance 250 Ω
AIP: potentiometer reference for ATV31pppA only
Max. sampling time: 8 ms
10-bit resolution
Precision ± 4.3%
Linearity ± 0.2% of maximum value
Use:
- 100 m maximum with shielded cable
- 25 m maximum with unshielded cable
Analog output configurable 1 analog output configurable for voltage, current.
for voltage, current and logic b AOC: analog current output 0 to 20 mA, maximum load impedance 800 Ω
output b AOV: analog voltage output 0 to +10V, minimum load impedance 470 Ω
8-bit resolution
Precision ± 1%
Linearity ± 0.2%
Only analog output AOC is configurable as a logic output.
b AOC: operation as logic output 24 V 20 mA max.
Configurable relay outputs R1A, R1B, R1C 1 relay logic output, one “N/C” contact and one “N/O” contact with common point.
Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for c 5 V.
Maximum switching capacity:
b on resistive load (cos ϕ = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for a 250 V or c 30 V
b on inductive load (cos ϕ = 0.4 and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for a 250 V or c 30 V
Switching: 100,000 operations
R2A, R2B 1 relay logic output, one “N/C” contact, contact open on fault.
Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for c 5 V.
Maximum switching capacity:
b on resistive load (cos ϕ = 1 and L/R = 0 ms): 5 A for a 250 V or c 30 V
b on inductive load (cos ϕ = 0.4 and L/R = 7 ms): 2 A for a 250 V or c 30 V
Switching: 100,000 operations

11
Characteristics (continued) 0
Altivar 31
Electrical characteristics (continued)

Logic inputs LI 6 programmable logic inputs
Impedance 3.5 kΩ
+ 24 V internal or 24 V external power supply (min. 19 V, max. 30 V)
Max. current: 100 mA
Multiple assignment makes it possible to configure several functions on one input
(example: LI1 assigned to forward and preset speed 2, LI3 assigned to reverse and
preset speed 3)
Positive logic State 0 if < 5 V or logic input not wired, state 1 if > 11 V
Negative logic State 0 if > 19 V or logic input not wired, state 1 if < 13 V
CLI position Connection to PLC output (see diagram page 36)
Maximum I/O connection capacity and tightening torque 2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
0.6 Nm
Acceleration and deceleration ramps Ramp profiles:
b linear, can be adjusted separately from 0.1 to 999.9 s
b S, U or customised
Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp time if braking capacities exceeded,
possible inhibition of this adaptation (use of braking resistor).
Braking to a standstill By d.c. injection:
b by a signal on a programmable logic input
b automatically as soon as the estimated output frequency drops to < 0.5 Hz, period
adjustable from 0 to 30 s or continuous, current adjustable from 0 to 1.2 In
Main protection and safety features of the drive b Thermal protection against overheating
b Protection against short-circuits between motor phases
b Protection against input phase breaks
b Protection against motor phase breaks
b Protection against overcurrent between output phases and earth
b Line supply undervoltage and overvoltage safety circuits
b Line supply phase loss safety function, for 3-phase supply
Motor protection Thermal protection integrated in the drive by continuous calculation of the l2t
(see page 48)
Dielectric strength Between earth and power c 2040 V for ATV 31ppppM2 and M3X, c 2410 V for ATV 31ppppN4,
terminals c 2550 V for ATV 31ppppS6X
Between control and power a 2880 V for ATV 31ppppM2 and M3X, a 3400 V for ATV 31ppppN4,
terminals a 3600 V for ATV 31ppppS6X
Insulation resistance to earth > 500 MΩ (electrical isolation) c 500 V for 1 minute
Signalling 1 red LED on front: LED lit indicates the presence of drive voltage
Display coded by four 7-segment display units displaying the CANopen bus status
(RUN and ERR).
Frequency resolution Display units Hz 0.1
Analog inputs Hz 0.1 to 100 Hz (calculate (high speed – low speed) /1024)
Time constant for reference change ms 5
Communication Modbus and CANopen are integrated into the drive and available via an RJ45
connector
Modbus RS 485 multidrop serial link
b Modbus in RTU mode
b Services supported: decimal function codes 03, 06, 16, 23 and 43
b Broadcasting
b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal
from 1 to 247
b Maximum number of Altivar 31 drives connected: 31 (two 470 Ω master pulldown
resistors)
b Transmission speed: 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps
Used for connecting:
b the remote terminal (option)
b the PowerSuite software workshop
b a PLC
b a microprocessor card
b a PC
CANopen To connect the ATV31 drive on the CANopen bus, use the VW3 CANTAP2 adapter.
b Services supported:
v Implicit exchange of Process Data Object
- 2 PDOs depending on DSP 402 velocity mode
- 2 configurable PDOs (data and transmission type)
- PDOs can be exchanged between slaves.
v Explicit exchange of Service Data Object
- 1 receive SDO and 1 transmit SDO
v Boot-up messages, emergency messages, node guarding and producer and
consumer heartbeat, sync and NMT
b Number of addresses: drive address can be configured via the integrated terminal
from 1 to 127
b Maximum number of Altivar 31 drives connected: 127
b Transmission speed: 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 kbps or 1 Mbps

12
Characteristics, Variable speed drives
special uses 0
Altivar 31
Torque characteristics (typical curves)

Tn
2,25
The curves below define the available continuous torque and transient overtorque for
both force-cooled and self-cooled motors. The only difference is in the ability of the
2 motor to provide a high continuous torque at less than half the nominal speed
1,75
1,7 Special uses
3
Use with a motor with a different rating to that of the drive
1,50
The device can supply any motor which has a power rating lower than that for which
1,25 it is designed.
For motor ratings slightly higher than that of the drive, check that the current taken
1 does not exceed the continuous output current of the drive.
0,95
2
0,75
Test on a low power motor or without a motor
1 4
0,50
In a testing or maintenance environment the drive can be checked without having to
switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of
0,25 high power drives). This use requires deactivation of motor phase loss detection.
0 Connecting motors in parallel

0 25/30 50/60 75/90 100/120 Hz
The rating of the drive must be greater than or equal to the sum of the currents of the
1 Self-cooled motor: continuous useful torque (1) motors to be connected to the drive.
2 Force-cooled motor: continuous useful torque In this case, external thermal protection must be provided for each motor using
3 Transient overtorque 1.7 to 2 Tn probes or LR2 thermal bimetal overload relays designed for a 1.2 In motor.
4 Torque in overspeed at constant power (2) If the number of motors in parallel is greater than or equal to 3, it is advisable to install
a 3-phase choke between the drive and the motors.
Switching the motor at the drive output

N
The drive can be switched when locked or unlocked. If the drive is switched on-the-
fly (drive unlocked), the motor is controlled and accelerates until it reaches the
reference speed smoothly following the acceleration ramp.
This use requires configuration of automatic catching a spinning load (“catch on the
t fly”) and activation of the function which manages the presence of a downstream
t1 t2 contactor.
1
Example: breaking of downstream contactor
KM1 0 t
KM1
Altivar 31 M
t1: deceleration without ramp (freewheel)

t2: acceleration with ramp
Typical applications: breaking safety circuit at drive outputs, "bypass" function,
switching of motors connected in parallel.
(1) For power ratings ≤ 250 W, motor derating is less important (20% instead of 50% at very low
frequencies).
(2) The nominal frequency of the motor and the maximum output frequency can be adjusted
between 40 and 500 Hz.
Note: Check the mechanical overspeed characteristics of the selected motor with the
manufacturer.

13
References 0
Altivar 31
Drives with heatsink (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Motor Line supply Altivar 31
Power Line current Apparent Max. Nominal Max. Power References (5) Weight
indicated on (2) power prospective current transient dissipated
rating plate (1) line Isc (4) current for at nominal
at U1 at U2 (3) 4 kHz 60 s load
kW HP A A kVA kA A A W kg
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filters
0.18 0.25 3.0 2.5 0.6 1 1.5 2.3 24 ATV 31H018M2 (6) 1.500
531248
0.37 0.5 5.3 4.4 1 1 3.3 5 41 ATV 31H037M2 (6 ) 1.500

0.55 0.75 6.8 5.8 1.4 1 3.7 5.6 46 ATV 31H055M2 (6) 1.500
0.75 1 8.9 7.5 1.8 1 4.8 7.2 60 ATV 31H075M2 (6) 1.500
1.1 1.5 12.1 10.2 2.4 1 6.9 10.4 74 ATV 31HU11M2 (6) 1.800
1.5 2 15.8 13.3 3.2 1 8 12 90 ATV 31HU15M2 (6) 1.800
ATV 31H037M2
2.2 3 21.9 18.4 4.4 1 11 16.5 123 ATV 31HU22M2 (6) 3.100
3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz, without EMC filters (7)
0.18 0.25 2.1 1.9 0.7 5 1.5 2.3 23 ATV 31H018M3X (6) 1.300
0.37 0.5 3.8 3.3 1.3 5 3.3 5 38 ATV 31H037M3X (6) 1.300
0.55 0.75 4.9 4.2 1.7 5 3.7 5.6 43 ATV 31H055M3X (6) 1.300
531249
0.75 1 6.4 5.6 2.2 5 4.8 7.2 55 ATV 31H075M3X (6) 1.300
1.1 1.5 8.5 7.4 3 5 6.9 10.4 71 ATV 31HU11M3X (6) 1.700
1.5 2 11.1 9.6 3.8 5 8 12 86 ATV 31HU15M3X (6) 1.700
2.2 3 14.9 13 5.2 5 11 16.5 114 ATV 31HU22M3X (6) 1.700
ATV 31HU40M3X 3 – 19.1 16.6 6.6 5 13.7 20.6 146 ATV 31HU30M3X (6) 2.900
4 5 24.2 21.1 8.4 5 17.5 26.3 180 ATV 31HU40M3X (6) 2.900
5.5 7.5 36.8 32 12.8 22 27.5 41.3 292 ATV 31HU55M3X (6) 6.400
7.5 10 46.8 40.9 16.2 22 33 49.5 388 ATV 31HU75M3X (6) 6.400
11 15 63.5 55.6 22 22 54 81 477 ATV 31HD11M3X (6) 10.500
15 20 82.1 71.9 28.5 22 66 99 628 ATV 31HD15M3X (6) 10.500
3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V 50/60 Hz, with integrated EMC filters
531250
0.37 0.5 2.2 1.7 1.5 5 1.5 2.3 32 ATV 31H037N4 (6) 1.800
0.55 0.75 2.8 2.2 1.8 5 1.9 2.9 37 ATV 31H055N4 (6) 1.800
0.75 1 3.6 2.7 2.4 5 2.3 3.5 41 ATV 31H075N4 (6) 1.800
1.1 1.5 4.9 3.7 3.2 5 3 4.5 48 ATV 31HU11N4 (6) 1.800
1.5 2 6.4 4.8 4.2 5 4.1 6.2 61 ATV 31HU15N4 (6) 1.800
2.2 3 8.9 6.7 5.9 5 5.5 8.3 79 ATV 31HU22N4 (6) 3.100
ATV 31HU75N4 3 – 10.9 8.3 7.1 5 7.1 10.7 125 ATV 31HU30N4 (6) 3.100
4 5 13.9 10.6 9.2 5 9.5 14.3 150 ATV 31HU40N4 (6) 3.100
5.5 7.5 21.9 16.5 15 22 14.3 21.5 232 ATV 31HU55N4 (6) 6.500
7.5 10 27.7 21 18 22 17 25.5 269 ATV 31HU75N4 (6) 6.500
11 15 37.2 28.4 25 22 27.7 41.6 397 ATV 31HD11N4 (6) 11.000
15 20 48.2 36.8 32 22 33 49.5 492 ATV 31HD15N4 (6) 11.000
531251
3-phase supply voltage: 525…600 V 50/60 Hz, without EMC filters (7)
0.75 1 8 2.4 2.5 5 1.7 2.6 36 ATV 31H075S6X 1.700
1.5 2 8 4.2 4.4 5 2.7 4.1 48 ATV 31HU15S6X 1.700
2.2 3 6.4 5.6 5.8 5 3.9 5.9 62 ATV 31HU22S6X 2.900
4 5 10.7 9.3 9.7 5 6.1 9.2 94 ATV 31HU40S6X 2.900
5.5 7.5 16.2 14.1 15 22 9 13.5 133 ATV 31HU55S6X 6.200
7.5 10 21.3 18.5 19 22 11 16.5 165 ATV 31HU75S6X 6.200
11 15 27.8 24.4 25 22 17 25.5 257 ATV 31HD11S6X 10.000
15 20 36.4 31.8 33 22 22 33 335 ATV 31HD15S6X 10.000
ATV 31HD15N4A
(1) These power ratings are for a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, in continuous operation. The switching frequency is
adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.
Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on
page 38.
(2) Typical value for a 4-pole motor and a maximum switching frequency of 4 kHz, with no additional line choke, for the max.
prospective line current.
(3) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V; 525-600 V).
(4) If line Isc is greater than the values in the table, add line chokes (see page 21).
(5) To order a drive intended for wire guiding applications, add a T to the end of the reference.
(6) The drive can also be ordered complete with potentiometer. In this case add the letter A to the reference for the drive you require
(e.g. ATV 31H018M2A).
(7) Optional EMC filter, see pages 22 and 23.
Presentation: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

14
References (continued) 0
Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
Customisable enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Power Line current (2) Apparent Max. Nominal Max. Power References (4) Weight
indicated on power prospective current transient dissipated
rating plate (1) line Isc (3) current for at nominal
at U1 at U2 4 kHz 60 s load
kW HP A A KVA kA A A W kg
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters
0.18 0.25 3 2.5 0.6 1 1.5 2.3 24 ATV 31C018M2 6.300
531252
0.37 0.5 5.3 4.4 1 1 3.3 5 41 ATV 31C037M2 6.300
0.55 0.75 6.8 5.8 1.4 1 3.7 5.6 46 ATV 31C055M2 6.300
0.75 1 8.9 7.5 1.8 1 4.8 7.2 60 ATV 31C075M2 6.300
1.1 1.5 12.1 10.2 2.4 1 6.9 10.4 74 ATV 31CU11M2 8.800
1.5 2 15.8 13.3 3.2 1 8 12 90 ATV 31CU15M2 8.800
2.2 3 21.9 18.4 4.4 1 11 16.5 123 ATV 31CU22M2 10.700

ATV 31C/Hpppp
3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated EMC filters
0.37 0.5 2.2 1.7 1.5 5 1.5 2.3 32 ATV 31C037N4 8.800
0.55 0.75 2.8 2.2 1.8 5 1.9 2.9 37 ATV 31C055N4 8.800
0.75 1 3.6 2.7 2.4 5 2.3 3.5 41 ATV 31C075N4 8.800
1.1 1.5 4.9 3.7 3.2 5 3 4.5 48 ATV 31CU11N4 8.800
1.5 2 6.4 4.8 4.2 5 4.1 6.2 61 ATV 31CU15N4 8.800
2.2 3 8.9 6.7 5.9 5 5.5 8.3 79 ATV 31CU22N4 10.700
3 – 10.9 8.3 7.1 5 7.1 10.7 125 ATV 31CU30N4 10.700
4 5 13.9 10.6 9.2 5 9.5 14.3 150 ATV 31CU40N4 10.700
Ready-assembled enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on page
38.
(5) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V).

15
References (continued) 0
Altivar 31
Drive kit
Drive kit (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Power Line current (2) Apparent Max. Nominal Max. Power References (4) Weight
indicated on power prospective current transient dissipated
rating plate (1) line Isc (3) current at nominal
for load
at U1 at U2 4 kHz 60 s
kW HP A A KVA kA A A W kg
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters
0.18 0.25 3 2.5 0.6 1 1.5 2.3 24 ATV 31K018M2 6.300
DF531254
0.37 0.5 5.3 4.4 1 1 3.3 5 41 ATV 31K037M2 6.300
0.55 0.75 6.8 5.8 1.4 1 3.7 5.6 46 ATV 31K055M2 6.300
0.75 1 8.9 7.5 1.8 1 4.8 7.2 60 ATV 31K075M2 6.300
1.1 1.5 12.1 10.2 2.4 1 6.9 10.4 74 ATV 31KU11M2 8.800
1.5 2 15.8 13.3 3.2 1 8 12 90 ATV 31KU15M2 8.800

ATV 31Kppppp
2.2 3 21.9 18.4 4.4 1 11 16.5 123 ATV 31KU22M2 10.700
3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters

0.37 0.5 2.2 1.7 1.5 5 1.5 2.3 32 ATV 31K037N4 8.800
DF531255
0.55 0.75 2.8 2.2 1.8 5 1.9 2.9 37 ATV 31K055N4 8.800
0.75 1 3.6 2.7 2.4 5 2.3 3.5 41 ATV 31K075N4 8.800
1.1 1.5 4.9 3.7 3.2 5 3 4.5 48 ATV 31KU11N4 8.800
1.5 2 6.4 4.8 4.2 5 4.1 6.2 61 ATV 31KU15N4 8.800
2.2 3 8.9 6.7 5.9 5 5.5 8.3 79 ATV 31KU22N4 10.700
3 – 10.9 8.3 7.1 5 7.1 10.7 125 ATV 31KU30N4 10.700
4 5 13.9 10.6 9.2 5 9.5 14.3 150 ATV 31KU40N4 10.700
5.5 7.5 21.9 16.5 15 22 14.3 21.5 232 ATV 31KU55N4 16.500
ATV 31Kppppp 7.5 10 27.7 21 18 22 17 25.5 269 ATV 31KU75N4 16.500
11 15 37.2 28.4 25 22 27.7 41.6 397 ATV 31KD11N4 23.000
15 20 48.2 36.8 32 22 33 49.5 492 ATV 31KD15N4 23.000
Above 4 kHz derate the nominal drive current. The nominal motor current should not exceed this value: see derating curve on
page 38.
(5) Nominal supply voltages, min. U1, max. U2 (200-240 V; 380-500 V).

16
References 0
Altivar 31
Accessories
Plate for mounting on 5 rail

Description For drives Reference Weight
kg
Plate for mounting ATV 31H018M2,ATV 31H037M2, VW3 A11851 0.200
on 5 rail, ATV31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2,
width 35 mm ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X,
ATV H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X
ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2, VW3 A31852 0.220
ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X,
ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31H037N4,
ATV 31H055N4, ATV 31H075N4,
ATV 31HU11N4, ATV 31HU15N4,
ATV 31H075S6X, ATV 31HU15S6X
UL Type 1 conformity kit (1)
kg
Mechanical device ATV 31H018M2,ATV 31H037M2, VW3 A31812 0.400
fixing to the underside of ATV 31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2
the Altivar 31
ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, VW3 A31811 0.400
ATV H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X
ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X VW3 A31813 0.400
ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2, VW3 A31814 0.500
ATV 31HU22M3X, ATV 31H037N4,
ATV 31H055N4, ATV 31H075N4,
ATV 31HU22M2, ATV 31HU30M3X, VW3 A31815 0.500
ATV 31HU40M3X, ATV 31HU22N4,
ATV 31HU22S6X, ATV 31HU40S6X
ATV 31HU55M3X, ATV 31HU75M3X, VW3 A31816 0.900
ATV 31HD11M3X, ATV 31HD15M3X, VW3 A31817 1.200
ATV 31HD11N4, ATV 31HD15N4,
ATV 31HD11S6X, ATV 31HD15S6X
(1) This device allows cables to be connected directly to the drive using conduits or cable glands.
Altivar 28 substitution kit

kg
Mechanical adapters ATV 31H018M2,ATV 31H037M2, VW3 A31821 –
allowing an ATV 31 to be ATV 31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2
used in place of an ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X,
ATV 28 of the same rating ATV H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X
(using the same fixing
holes)
ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2, VW3 A31822 –
ATV 31HU22M3X,
ATV 31HU55N4, ATV 31HU75N4, VW3 A31823 –
Remote terminal
Description Reference Weight
kg
For ATV 31 drives of all ratings, assembly comprising: VW3 A31101 –
- terminal, cable fitted with 2 connectors
- seal and screws for IP 65 mounting on an enclosure door
ESC
ENT
Documentation
stop
reset
FWO
RUN kg
REV
- Simplified ATV 31 user’s manual Supplied with the – –

and CD-ROM, comprising: drive
VW3 A31101 - a User’s manual for the drives
- a User’s manual for Modbus and
CANopen
International Technical Manual (ITM) CD-ROM DCI CD39811 0.150

17
Presentation, Variable speed drives
characteristics 0
Altivar 31
Options: braking resistors
Presentation
The resistor enables the Altivar 31 drive to operate while braking to a standstill or in
braked operation, by dissipating the braking energy.
Two types of resistor are available:
- enclosed model (IP 30 enclosure) designed to comply with EMC regulations and
protected by a temperature-controlled switch or thermal relay
- non-protected model (IP00) for low power ratings only
They are designed for machine applications with high inertia, driving loads, machines
with fast cycles.
Characteristics
References VW3 A58702 to VW3 A58732 to VW3 A58736 and VW3 A66704
VW3 A58704 VW3 A58735 VW3 A58737
Ambient air temperature °C 40
Degree of protection of IP 00 IP 30 IP 23
enclosure
Resistor protection None By temperature-controlled switch (1) By thermal relay (2)
Temperature-controlled Trip temperature °C – 130 ± 5% 260 ± 14% –
switch Max. voltage - max. current – a 110 V - 0.3 A a 220 V - 6 A –
Min. voltage - min. current – c 24 V - 0.01 A –
Maximum contact resistance mΩ – 150 50 –
Load factor of resistors The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the enclosure
at 40°C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the majority of
common applications:
- braking for 2 seconds with a torque of 0.6 Tn every 40 seconds
- braking for 0.8 second with a torque of 1.5 Tn every 40 seconds
Load factor of drives The internal circuits for drives used for braking on external resistors are sized for the
following cycles. If they are exceeded, the drive will lock and display a fault.
- 1.5 TN for 60 seconds per 140-second cycle
- TN continuously
(1) The contact must be connected in sequence (used for signalling or for controlling the line contactor).
(2) To be ordered separately, 8 A rating.
Load factor and determining the nominal power
Speed The value of the average power that can be dissipated by the resistor in the
enclosure at 40°C is determined for a braking load factor corresponding to the
majority of common applications. This load factor is defined above.
0 Time For a specific application (e.g. handling), the nominal resistor power has to be
t
T redefined by taking account of the new load factor.
t
Load factor: ---
T
t: braking time in s
T: cycle time in s
Chart 1 Chart 2
Graph of the average power as a function of the braking Permissible resistor overload as a function of time (characteristic curve).
torque for a load factor.
K1 K2
1 20
60% 18
40% 16
20% 14
0,1
10% 12
0,06
5% 10
8
2% 7
6
0,01
4
2
0 t (s)
1 10 100 1000
0,001
0,1 0,5 0,6 1 1,5 Tb/Tn
Example:
Motor of power Pm = 4 kW Use chart 2 to determine the coefficient K2 corresponding to a braking time of
Motor efficiency η = 0.85 10 seconds.
Braking torque Tb = 0.6 Tn K2 = 7
Braking time t = 10 s
Cycle time T = 50 s The nominal resistor power (Pn) must be greater than:
Load factor Lf = --Tt- = 20%
Pn = Pm × K1 × η æ 1 + -------------------ö = 4,10 × 0,06 × 0,85 æ 1 + -----------------ö = 350W
1 3 1
è K2 × Lfø è 7 × 0,2ø
Use chart 1 to determine the coefficient K1
corresponding to a braking torque of 0.6 Tn and a load
factor of 20%. K1 = 0.06
18
References 0
Altivar 31
Options: braking resistors
For drives Min. Ohmic Average power Reference Weight

resistor value available at
value
(1) 40°C(2) 50°C
Ω Ω W W kg
Non-protected braking resistors
ATV 31H/C/K018M2, ATV 31H/C/K037M2, 40 100 32 28 VW3 A58702 0.600
ATV 31H/C/K055M2, ATV 31H/C/K075M2 40
ATV 31H/C/KU11M2, ATV 31H/C/KU15M2, 27
531231
ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, 40

ATV 31H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X, 40
ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, 27
ATV 31H/C/K037N4, ATV 31H/C/K055N4, 80
ATV 31H/C/K075N4, 80
ATV 31H/C/KU11N4, ATV 31H/C/KU15N4, 54
ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 54
ATV 31H075S6X 96
ATV 31HU15S6X, ATV31HU22S6X 64
ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, 55 100 40 35 VW3 A58703 0.850
ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 36
ATV 31HU40S6X 44
ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, 25 68 32 28 VW3 A58704 0.600
ATV 31HU22M3X, 25
ATV 31HU30M3X 16
Protected braking resistors
ATV 31H/C/K018M2, ATV 31H/C/K037M2, 40 100 32 28 VW3 A58732 2.000
ATV 31H/C/K055M2, ATV 31H/C/K075M2, 40
ATV 31H/C/KU11M2, ATV 31H/C/KU15M2, 27
ATV 31H018M3X, ATV 31H037M3X, 40
ATV 31H055M3X, ATV 31H075M3X, 40
VW3 A58702 ATV 31HU11M3X, ATV 31HU15M3X, 27
ATV 31H/C/K037N4, ATV 31H/C/K055N4, 80
ATV 31H/C/K075N4, 80
AATV 31H/C/KU11N4, ATV 31H/C/KU15N4, 54
ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 54
ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, 25 68 32 28 VW3 A58733 2.000
ATV 31HU22M3X, 25
ATV 31HU30M3X 16
531232
ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, 55
ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 36
ATV 31HU22M3X, 25
ATV 31HU30M3X 16
ATV 31H/C/KU30N4, 55 100 40 35 VW3 A58734 2.000
ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 36
ATV 31H/KU55N4, 29 60 80 69 VW3 A58735 3.400
ATV 31H/KU75N4 19
ATV 31HU55S6X 34
ATV 31HU75S6X 23
ATV 31HU40M3X 16 28 200 173 VW3 A58736 5.100
ATV 31H/KD11N4, ATV 31H/KD15N4 20
ATV 31HD11S6X, ATV 31HD15S6X 24
ATV 31HU55M3X, ATV 31HU75M3X 8 14 400 346 VW3 A58737 6.100
ATV 31HD11M3X, ATV 31HD15M3X 5 10 1000 866 VW3 A66704 (3) 17.000
VW3 A5873p (1) Depends on the drive rating.

(2) Power that can be dissipated by the resistor at the maximum temperature of 115°C, corresponding to a maximum temperature
rise of 75°C in a 40°C environment.
(3) The various ohmic values are obtained as a function of the connection, described in the resistor instructions.
19
characteristics 0
Altivar 31
Options: line chokes
Presentation
These chokes provide improved protection against overvoltages on the line supply
and reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the drive.
The recommended chokes are used to limit the line current.

They have been developed to conform to standard EN 50178 (VDE 0160 level 1 high
energy overvoltages on the line supply).
The values of the chokes are defined for a voltage drop between 3% and 5% of the
nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque.
The use of line chokes is recommended in particular under the following

circumstances:
b Line supply with significant disturbance from other equipment (interference,
overvoltages)
b Line supply with voltage imbalance between phases > 1.8 % of nominal voltage
b Drive supplied with power by a line with very low impedance (in the vicinity of
power transformers 10 times more powerful than the drive rating)
The prospective short-circuit current at the point of connection of the drive must not
exceed the maximum value indicated in the tables of references. The use of line
chokes allows connection on the following networks:
- Max. Isc 22 kA for 200/240 V
- Max. Isc 65 kA for 380/500 V and 525/600 V
b Installation of a large number of frequency converters on the same line

b Reduction of overload in cos ϕ correction capacitors, if the installation has a power
factor correction unit
Type of line choke VZ1 L00 VZ1 L00 VZ1 L01 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6 VW3 A6
4M010 7UM50 8UM20 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506
Characteristics
Conformity to standards EN 50178 (VDE 0160 level 1 high energy overvoltages on the line supply)
Voltage drop Between 3 and 5% of the nominal line voltage. Values higher than this will cause loss of torque.
Degree of protection Choke IP 00

Terminals IP 20 IP 10 IP 00
Value of choke mH 10 5 2 10 4 2 1 0.5 0.3
Nominal current A 4 7 18 4 10 16 30 60 100
Loss W 17 20 30 45 65 75 90 80 –
20
References 0
Altivar 31
Options: line chokes
Altivar 31 Choke
Single phase Line current without Line current with Reference Weight
or choke choke
3-phase at U min. at U max. at U min. at U max.
A A A A kg
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (1) 50/60 Hz
ATV 31H/C/K018M2 3.0 2.5 2.1 1.8 VZ1 L004M010 0.630
ATV 31H/C/K037M2 5.3 4.4 3.9 3.3
ATV 31H/C/K055M2 6.8 5.8 5.2 4.3 VZ1 L007UM50 0.880
ATV 31H/C/K075M2 8.9 7.5 7.0 5.9
ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 12.1 10.2 10.2 8.6 VZ1 L018UM20 1.990
ATV 31H/C/KU15M2 15.8 13.3 13.4 11.4
ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 21.9 18.4 19.2 16.1
803687
3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V (1) 50/60 Hz

ATV 31H018M3X 2.1 1.9 1 0.9 VW3 A66501 1.500
ATV 31H037M3X 3.8 3.3 1.9 1.6
ATV 31H055M3X 4.9 4.2 2.5 2.2
ATV 31H075M3X 6.4 5.6 3.3 2.9
ATV 31HU11M3X 8.5 7.4 4.8 4.2 VW3 A66502 3.000
ATV 31HU15M3X 11.1 9.6 6.4 5.6
ATV 31HU22M3X 14.9 13 9.2 8 VW3 A66503 3.500
ATV 31HU30M3X 19.1 16.6 12.3 10.7
ATV 31HU40M3X 24.2 21.1 16.1 14 VW3 A66504 6.000
ATV 31HU55M3X 36.8 32 21.7 19
ATV 31HU75M3X 46.8 40.9 29 25.2
VW3 A6650p ATV 31HD11M3X 63.5 55.6 41.6 36.5 VW3 A66505 11.000
ATV 31HD15M3X 82.1 71.9 55.7 48.6
ATV 31H/C/K037N4 2.2 1.7 1.1 0.9 VW3 A66501 1.500
ATV 31H/C/K055N4 2.8 2.2 1.4 1.2
ATV 31H/C/K075N4 3.6 2.7 1.8 1.5
ATV 31H/C/KU11N4 4.9 3.7 2.6 2
ATV 31H/C/KU15N4 6.4 4.8 3.4 2.6
ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 8.9 6.7 5 4.1 VW3 A66502 3.000
ATV 31H/C/KU30N4 10.9 8.3 6.5 5.2
ATV 31H/C/KU40N4 13.9 10.6 8.5 6.6
ATV 31H/KU55N4 21.9 16.5 11.7 9.3 VW3 A66503 3.500
ATV 31H/KU75N4 27.7 21 15.4 12.1
ATV 31H/KD11N4 37.2 28.4 22.5 18.1 VW3 A66504 6.000
ATV 31H/KD15N4 48.2 36.8 29.6 23.3
ATV 31H075S6X 2.5 2.4 1.4 1.4 VW3 A66501 1.500
ATV 31HU15S6X 4.4 4.2 2.4 2.3
ATV 31HU22S6X 5.8 5.6 3.8 3.6
ATV 31HU40S6X 9.7 9.3 6 5.8 VW3 A66502 3.000
ATV 31HU55S6X 14.7 14.1 7.8 7.5
ATV 31HU75S6X 19.3 18.5 11 10.7 VW3 A66503 3.500
ATV 31HD11S6X 25.4 24.4 15 14.4
ATV 31HD15S6X 33.2 31.8 21.1 20.6 VW3 A66504 6.000
(1) Nominal supply voltage: U min.…U max.
21
characteristics 0
Altivar 31
Options: additional EMC input filters
Presentation
Function
The Altivar 31 has built-in radio interference input filters to meet EMC "product"
standards for variable speed drives IEC/EN 61800-3 and to comply with the
European EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) directive.
The additional filters enable the drives to meet more stringent requirements: these
filters are designed to reduce conducted emissions on the line supply below the limits
of standards EN 55011 class A (1) or EN 55022 class B.
These additional filters are installed underneath ATV 31H drives. They can be
installed at the side of the product in the case of ATV 31C and K drives. They act as
supports for the drives and are fixed to them via tapped holes.
Use according to the type of network
Use of these additional filters is only possible on TN (neutral connection) and TT

(neutral to earth) type networks.
The standard IEC 61800-3, annex D2.1, indicates that on IT (impedance earthed or
isolated neutral) networks the filters can randomise the operation of insulation
monitors.
The efficiency of additional filters on this type of network also depends on the nature
of the impedance between neutral and earth and is therefore unpredictable.
If a machine is to be installed on an IT network, one solution is to insert an isolation

transformer and to connect locally to the machine on a TN or TT network.
Characteristics
Conformity to standards EN 133200
Degree of protection IP 21 and IP 41 on upper part
Maximum relative humidity 93% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 68-2-3
Ambient air temperature Operation °C - 10…+ 60

around the device Storage °C - 25…+ 70
Maximum operating altitude Without derating m 1000 (above this, derate the current by 1% per additional 100 m)
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz

1 gn peak from 13 to 150 Hz
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 15 gn for 11 ms
Max. nominal voltage 50/60 Hz single phase V 240 + 10%
50/60 Hz 3-phase V 240 + 10%

500 + 10%
600 + 10%
22
References 0
Altivar 31
Options: additional EMC input filters
For drives Filter

Reference Maximum length of In Il Loss Reference Weight
shielded cable (2) (3) (4)
EN 55011 EN 55022
class A class B
(1) (2)
m m A mA W kg
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz
ATV 31H/C/K018M2 50 20 9 100 – VW3 A31401 –
ATV 31H/C/K037M2
ATV 31H/C/K055M2
ATV 31H/C/K075M2
ATV 31H/C/KU11M2 50 20 16 150 – VW3 A31403 –
ATV 31H/C/KU15M2
ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 50 20 22 80 VW3 A31405 –
3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz
ATV 31H018M3X 5 – 7 7 – VW3 A31402 –
ATV 31H037M3X
ATV 31H055M3X
ATV 31H075M3X
ATV 31HU11M3X 5 – 15 15 – VW3 A31404 –
ATV 31HU15M3X
ATV 31HU22M3X
ATV 31HU30M3X 5 – 25 35 – VW3 A31406 –
ATV 31HU40M3X
ATV 31HU55M3X 5 – 47 45 – VW3 A31407 –
ATV 31HU75M3X
ATV 31HD11M3X 5 – 83 15 – VW3 A31408 –
ATV 31HD15M3X
ATV 31H/C/K037N4 50 20 15 15 – VW3 A31404 –
ATV 31H/C/K055N4
ATV 31H/C/K075N4
ATV 31H/C/KU11N4
ATV 31H/C/KU15N4
ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 50 20 25 35 – VW3 A31406 –
ATV 31H/C/KU30N4
ATV 31H/C/KU40N4
ATV 31H/KU55N4 50 20 47 45 – VW3 A31407 –
ATV 31H/KU75N4
ATV 31H/KD11N4 50 20 49 45 – VW3 A31409 –
ATV 31H/KD15N4
(1) The filter selection tables show the length limits for the shielded cables connecting the motors
to the drives for a switching frequency of 2 to 16 kHz. These limits are given as examples only
as they vary depending on the interference capacity of the motors and the cables used. If
motors are connected in parallel, it is the total length that should be taken into account.
(2) In: Nominal filter current.
(3) Maximum earth leakage current at 50 Hz.
(4) By heat dissipation.
23
characteristics 0
Altivar 31
Options: output filters and motor chokes
Presentation
By inserting an output filter between the drive and the motor, it is possible to:
b Limit the dv/dt at the motor terminals (500 to 1500 V/µs), for cables longer
than 50 m
b Filter interference caused by opening a contactor placed between the filter and
the motor
b Reduce the motor earth leakage current
When using a downstream contactor between the drive and the motor, ferrite
suppressors should be fitted to each motor cable for certain drive ratings supplied
with a single phase or 3-phase 200 V supply.
Principle
LR filter cell LC filter cell
This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes and This cell comprises 3 high frequency chokes
3 resistors. and 3 capacitors.
LR filter LC filter
U1
U1
V1
Altivar 31
V1 M1 W1
Altivar 31
3
W1
C
C
Motor choke Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening

For standard motor cables longer than 100 m
(50 m for shielded cables), a choke can be used to limit
overvoltages at the motor terminals.
Altivar 31 M1
3 M1
Altivar 31 Contactor
3
Characteristics (1)
LR filter cells LC filter cells Motor chokes
(2)
VW3 A5845p VW3 A6641p VW3 A6650p
Drive switching frequency kHz 0.5 ... 4 2 or 4 12 4
max.
Length of motor cable Shielded cables m y 100 y 100 y 50 y 100
Unshielded cables m – y 200 y 100 –
Degree of protection IP 20 IP 00 IP 00 IP 20
(1) Filter performance is ensured if the cable lengths between the motor and the drive given in
the above table are not exceeded.
For an application with several motors connected in parallel, the cable length must include all
tap-offs. If a cable longer than that recommended is used, the filters may overheat.
(2) Please consult your Regional Sales Office for frequencies greater than 4 kHz or cables longer
than 100 m.
24
References 0
Altivar 31
Options: output filters and motor chokes
LR filter cells
For drives Loss Nominal Reference Weight
521425
current
W A kg
ATV 31H/C/K018M2 150 10 VW3 A58451 7.400
ATV 31H/C/K037M2
ATV 31H/C/K055M2
ATV 31H/C/K075M2
ATV 31H/C/KU11M2
ATV 31H/C/KU15M2
ATV 31H018M3X
VW3 A58451 ATV 31H037M3X
ATV 31H055M3X
ATV 31H075M3X
ATV 31HU11M3X
ATV 31HU15M3X
ATV 31H/C/K037N4
ATV 31H/C/K055N4
ATV 31H/C/K075N4
ATV 31H/C/KU11N4
ATV 31H/C/KU15N4
ATV 31H/C/KU22N4
ATV 31H/C/KU30N4
ATV 31H/C/KU40N4
ATV 31H075S6X
ATV 31HU15S6X
ATV 31HU22S6X
ATV 31HU40S6X
ATV 31HU55S6X
ATV 31H/C/KU22M2 180 16 VW3 A58452 7.400
ATV 31HU22M3X
ATV 31HU30M3X
ATV 31H/KU55N4
ATV 31HU75S6X
ATV 31HU40M3X 220 33 VW3 A58453 12.500
ATV 31HU55M3X
ATV 31HU75M3X
ATV 31H/KU75N4
ATV 31HD11S6X
ATV 31HD15S6X
LC filter cells
For drives Reference Weight
kg
ATV 31HD11M3X VW3 A66412 3.500
ATV 31HD15M3X
Motor chokes
For drives Loss Nominal Reference Weight
current
W A kg
ATV 31H/C/KU22N4 65 10 VW3 A66502 3.000
ATV 31H/C/KU30N4
ATV 31H/C/KU40N4
ATV 31H/C/KU22M2, ATV 31HU22M3X 75 16 VW3 A66503 3.500
ATV 31HU30M3X, ATV 31H/KU55N4
ATV 31HU75S6X
ATV 31HU40M3X 90 30 VW3 A66504 6.000
ATV 31HU55M3X
ATV 31HU75M3X
ATV 31H/KU75N4
ATV 31H/KD11N4
ATV 31HD11S6X
ATV 31HD15S6X
ATV 31H/KD15N4 80 60 VW3 A66505 11.000
ATV 31HD11M3X – 100 VW3 A66506 16.000
ATV 31HD15M3X
Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening
For drives Sold in lots Unit Weight
of reference kg
ATV 31H018M2 3 VW3 A31451 –
ATV 31H037M2, ATV 31H018M3 3 VW3 A31452 –
ATV 31H037M3
ATV 31H055M2, ATV 31H075M2 3 VW3 A31453 –
ATV 31HU11M2, ATV 31HU15M2
ATV 31H055M3, ATV 31H075M3
25
Presentation 0
Altivar 31
Modbus and CANopen communication buses

The Altivar 31 can be connected directly to Modbus and CANopen buses by means of an RJ45 connector, which supports both protocols.
The communication function provides access to the drive’s configuration, adjustment, control and monitoring functions.
CANopen Modbus
Connections via splitter blocks and Connections via junction boxes
RJ45 connectors
1 1 1
2 2 3 4 6 4 6 5
2 5 3 4
3 3 3
5
4 4 4 4 4 6 7
ATV 31 ATV 31 ATV 31
1 PLC (1) 1 PLC (1) 1 PLC (1)

2 CANopen trunk cable 2 Modbus cable depending on the type of 2 Modbus cable depending on the type of
3 CANopen tap junction VW3 CAN TAP2 controller or PLC controller or PLC
4 CANopen drop cable VW3 CAN CA RRpp 3 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 3 Modbus cables TSX CSAp00
4 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp 4 T-junction box TSX SCA 50
5 Line terminators VW3 A8 306 RC 5 Subscriber socket TSX SCA 62
6 Modbus T-junction boxes 6 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306
VW3 A8 306 TFpp (with cable) 7 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 D30
Connections via screw terminals

In this case, use a Modbus drop cable VW3 A8 306 D30 and line terminators
VW3 A8 306 DRC.
Other communication buses
The Altivar 31 can also be connected to the following networks via a module (bridge or gateway):
b Ethernet
b Fipio
b Profibus DP
b DeviceNet
1 1 1 To network
2 2 2 Communication modules
3 Cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp,
3 VW3 P07 306 R10 or
4 3 VW3 A8 306 D30, depending on the
ATV 31 type of module.
4 Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3
5 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Rpp
6 6 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 RC
5 5 5
ATV 31
(1) Please consult our specialist catalogues.
26
References 0
Altivar 31
Modbus and CANopen communication buses

Connection accessories
kg
CANopen bus junction box VW3 CAN TAP2 –
563028
Modbus junction box TSX SCA 50 0.520

3 screw terminals, RC line terminator
To be connected using cable VW3 A8 306 D30
Modbus subscriber socket TSX SCA 62 0.570
2 female 15-way SUB-D connectors
and 2 screw terminals, RC line terminator
TSX SCA 50 To be connected using cable VW3 A8 306
Modbus splitter block LU9 GC3 0.500
10 RJ45 connectors and 1 screw terminal
R = 120 Ω, C = 1 nF
563029
Modbus line For RJ45 VW3 A8 306 RC 0.200

terminators connector
(1) R = 150 Ω VW3 A8 306 R 0.200
For screw R = 120 Ω, C = 1 nF VW3 A8 306 DRC 0.200

terminals
TSX SCA 62
R = 150 Ω VW3 A8 306 DR 0.200
Modbus T-junction boxes With integrated cable (0.3 m) VW3 A8 306 TF03 –
With integrated cable (1 m) VW3 A8 306 TF10 –
Connecting cables
Description Length Connectors Reference Weight
m kg
Cables 0.3 m 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 CAN CA RR03 0.050
for CANopen 10 m 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 CAN CA RR1 0.500
bus
Cables for 3 1 RJ45 connector VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150
Modbus bus and one end stripped
3 1 RJ45 connector and 1 male VW3 A8 306 0.150
15-way SUB-D connector for
TSX SCA 62
0.3 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R03 0.050
1 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R10 0.050
3 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R30 0.150
Cables for 1 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 P07 306 R10 0.050

Profibus
gateway
LA9 P307
RS 485 double 100 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 100 –
shielded twisted
pair cables 200 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 200 –
563030
500 Supplied without connector TSX CSA 500 –
Other communication buses

Description Cables to be connected Reference Weight
kg
174 CEV 300 20 Ethernet/Modbus bridge VW3 A8 306 D30 174 CEV 300 20 (2) 0.500
with 1 x Ethernet 10baseT port
(RJ45)
563031
Fipio/Modbus gateway VW3 A8 306 Rpp LUF P1 0.240

(3)
DeviceNet/Modbus gateway VW3 A8 306 Rpp LUF P9 0.240
(3)
563032
Profibus DP/Modbus gateway VW3 P07 306 R10 LA9 P307 0.240
Parameters set using standard
Profibus DP configurator (3)
Profibus DP/Modbus gateway VW3 A8 306 Rpp LUF P7 0.240

Parameters set using
ABC Configurator software (3)
(1) Sold in lots of 2.
LUF P1 LA9 P307 (2) Please consult our catalogue "Premium automation platform".
(3) Please consult our catalogue "Soft starters and variable speed drives".
27
Presentation 0
PowerSuite software workshop 0
The PowerSuite software workshop, for PC or Pocket PC, is designed for setting up
Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives.
This single program is an easy-to-use interface for configuring Altistart and Tesys
531439
model U starters and all Altivar drives in a Microsoft Windows® environment in five
languages (English, French, German, Italian and Spanish).
Functions
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used for preparing, programming, setting
up and maintaining Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives.
It can be used:
b stand alone to prepare and store starter or drive configuration files
b connected to the starter or drive to:
v configure
v adjust
v monitor (except for Altivar 11 drives)
v control (except for Altivar 11 drives)
PowerSuite with PC screen v transfer and compare configuration files between PowerSuite and the starter or
Oscilloscope function
drive
The software workshop has online contextual help.

PowerSuite can be used to generate configuration files which can then be:
b saved to hard disk, CD-ROM, floppy disk, etc.
b printed
b exported to office automation software
b exchanged between a PC and a Pocket PC using standard synchronization
software. PowerSuite PC and Pocket PC configuration files are both the same format.
The software associated with the Altivar 31 has been enhanced to include the
following new functions:
oscilloscope function, parameter name customization, configuration locking using a
password, creation of a user menu, etc.
Connections
Telemecanique starters and variable speed drives are equipped with a Modbus
RS485 terminal port (except for Altivar 68 drives).
b The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the terminal port
via the serial port on the PC or Pocket PC.
Two types of connection are possible:
- connection to a single starter or drive (point-to-point connection)
- connection to a set of starters or drives (multidrop connection)
b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can also be connected to an Ethernet
network (Please consult our catalogue "Soft starters and variable speed drives). In
531440
this case, the starters and drives can be accessed:

- using an Ethernet-Modbus bridge 174 CEV 300 20
- using a communication option card VW3 A58310 (for Altivar 38, 58 and 58F
drives only)
Hardware and software environment

b The PowerSuite for PC software workshop can operate in the following PC
environments and configurations:
v Microsoft Windows® 95 OSR2-98 SE, Microsoft Windows® NT4.X SP5,
Microsoft Windows® Me, Microsoft Windows® 2000, Microsoft Windows® XP
v Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM
v SVGA or higher definition monitor
b The PowerSuite for Pocket PC software workshop is compatible with Pocket PCs
equipped with a Windows for Pocket PC 2002 operating system and an ARM or XSCALE
PowerSuite with Pocket PC screen processor.
Performance tests for version V2.0.0 of the PowerSuite software workshop have
been carried out on the following Pocket PCs:
v Hewlett Packard® Jornada series 560
v Compaq® IPAQ series 3800 and 3900
28
PowerSuite software workshop 0
PowerSuite software workshop for PC and Pocket PC

kg
563019
PowerSuite for PC kit comprising: VW3 A8101 0.400

- 1 PowerSuite CD-ROM
- 1 PC connection kit
PowerSuite for Pocket PC kit comprising: VW3 A8102 0.400

- 1 PowerSuite CD-ROM
- 1 Pocket PC connection kit
PowerSuite CD-ROM VW3 A8104 0.100

- Contains the software for PC and Pocket PC in English,
French, German, Italian and Spanish along with the technical
documentation and the ABC configurator program.
VW3 A8101 PowerSuite upgrade CD-ROM VW3 A8105 0.100
- Contains the software for PC and Pocket PC in English,
French, German, Italian and Spanish along with the technical
documentation and the ABC configurator program.
PC connection kit comprising: VW3 A8106 0.350
- 2 x 3 m connecting cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors
- 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 58,
563020
ATV 58F and ATV 38 drives

- 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 68 drives
- 1 converter marked “RS 232/RS 485 PC” with one 9-way
female SUB-D connector and 1 RJ 45 connector
- 1 converter, for ATV 11 drives, with one 4-way male connector
and 1 RJ 45 connector
Pocket PC connection kit comprising: VW3 A8111 0.300

- 2 x 0.6 m connecting cables with 2 x RJ 45 connectors
- 1 RJ 45/9-way SUB-D adaptor for connecting ATV 58,
ATV 58F and ATV 38 drives
- 1 converter marked “RS 232/RS 485 PPC” with one 9-way
male SUB-D connector and 1 RJ 45 connector
- 1 converter, for ATV 11 drives, with one 4-way male connector
VW3 A8102 and 1 RJ 45 connector
Caution: The serial synchronization cable must be ordered

separately from the supplier of the Pocket PC.
(1) To find out about the latest available version, please consult your Regional Sales Office.
Compatibility
Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with the Controller Soft start/ Drives
starters and variable speed drives starter soft stop
unit
TeSys ATS 48 ATV 11 ATV28 ATV 31 ATV 38 ATV 58, ATV 68
model U ATV 58F
PowerSuite software workshop with serial link for PC
Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8101, u V 1.40 u V 1.30 u V 1.40 u V 1.0 u V 2.0.0 u V 1.40 u V 1.0 u V 1.50
VW3 A8104,
VW3 A8105
PowerSuite software workshop with Ethernet link for PC

Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8101, – u V 1.50 – u V 1.50 u V 2.0.0 u V 1.50 –
VW3 A8104, and and and and Ethernet V2
VW3 A8105 Ethernet/ Ethernet- Ethernet/ communication card
Modbus Modbus Modbus or bridge
bridge bridge bridge
PowerSuite software workshop for Pocket PC
Kit and CD-ROM VW3 A8102, u V 1.50 u V 1.30 u V 1.40 u V 1.20 u V 2.0.0 u V 1.40 u V 1.20 –
VW3 A8104,
VW3 A8105
Incompatible products Compatible products and software versions
Compatibility of the PowerSuite software workshop with Pocket PCs

Pocket PC PowerSuite software version
Hewlett Packard® Jornada 525, 545, 548 not compatible from V 2.0.0
Hewlett Packard® Jornada series 560 u 1.30
Compaq® IPAQ series 3800 and 3900 u 1.30
29
Dimensions 0
Altivar 31
ATV 31H0ppM3X/MXA, ATV 31H0ppM2/M2A

Plate for EMC mounting
(supplied with the drive)
5
2xØ5
121,5
145
2xM5 screw
18,5
ATV 31H c
018M3X, 037M3X 120
60 055M3X, 075M3X 130
50
8 (1) = =
018M2, 037M2 130
c 72
055M2, 075M2 140 M5 4xM4
(1) Only for drives whose reference ends in A.
ATV 31HUppM2/M2A, ATV 31HU1pM3X/M3XA to ATV 31HU4pM3X/M3XA, ATV 31H0ppN4/N4A to ATV 31HU40N4/N4A,
ATV 31H075S6X to ATV 31HU40S6X
J
Ø
ATV 31H a b c d G H J K Ø
U1pM3X 105 143 130 49 93 121.5 5 16.5 2x5
H
b
U1pM2, U22M3X 105 143 150 49 93 121.5 5 16.5 2x5 2xM5 screw
037N4 to U15N4
U75S6X, U15S6X
K
U22M2, 140 184 150 48 126 157 6.5 20.5 4x5

8 (1) = G = HUp0M3X
d
c a U22N4 to U40N4
U22S6X, U40S6X M5 4xM4
ATV 31HU55M3X/M3XA, ATV 31HU75M3X/M3XA, ATV 31HU55N4/N4A, ATV 31HU75N4/N4A, ATV 31HU55S6X, ATV 31HU75S6X
5
4xØ5
210
232
2xM5 screw
17
8 (1) = 160 =
75
170 180
4xM4 M5
ATV 31HD1pM3X/M3XA, ATV 31HD1pN4/N4A, ATV 31HD1pS6X
4xØ6
7
329,5
295
2xM5 screw
75
8 (1) = 225 =
27,5
190 245
4xM4 M5
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Schemes: Functions:

30
Dimensions 0
Altivar 31
Enclosed drive
ATV 31C0ppM2
4xØ5,5
240
218
163 192
210
ATV 31CU11M2, ATV 31CU15M2, ATV 31C0ppN4, ATV 31CU11N4, ATV 31CU15N4
4xØ5,5
297
277
192 197
215
ATV 31CU22M2, ATV 31CU22N4, ATV 31CU30N4, ATV 31CU40N4
4xØ5,5
340
318
208 212
230

31
Dimensions 0
Altivar 31
Drive kit
ATV 31KpppM2, ATV 31K0ppN4, ATV 31KU22N4, ATV 31KUp0N4

Mounting
a a1 E
10
K
K
H
b
b1
H
c1 F
c G F 7xØ5,5
G
ATV 31K a a1 b b1 c c1 E F G H K
0ppM2 254 214 280 240 153 123 10 117 234 260 130
U1pM2, 0ppN4, U1pN4 250 219 337 297 186 127 1 115 230 317 158.5
U22M2, UppN4 265 234 380 340 209 134 1 122.5 245 360 180
Note: product supplied with drilling template.
ATV 31KU55N4, ATV 31KU75N4, ATV 31KD1pN4/pM2

Mounting
c a
8xØ8
15
a2
35
H
K
K1
b1
b
J
E Ø
H
7
35
19 F F 19
30 G 30
15
a1
ATV 31K a a1 a2 b b1 c E F G H J K K1 Ø
U55N4, U75N4 400 340 334 600 444 343 12 155 250 49 500 180 0 12 x 6
D11N4, D15N4 450 370 386 700 546 267 13 180 280 39 600 150 180 14 x 6
Note: product supplied with drilling template.

32
Dimensions (continued) 0
Altivar 31
Plates for mounting on 5 rail

VW3 A11851 VW3 A31852
143,6
144
37,9 77,5 40 105
UL NEMA Type 1 conformity kit

VW3 A31811 to VW3 A31817
(1)
b
(2)
VW3 ∆b
A31812 77
A31813 and A31814 107
A31815 138
A31816 179
A31817 244
(1) Drive
(2) Kit for VW3 A3181p
Remote terminal
VW3 A31101
Mounting
55,6
24
52
79,6
4xØ3,5 Ø36

33
Altivar 31
Bare braking resistors

VW3 A58702 and A58704 VW3 A58703
2-wire output, length 0.5 m 2-wire output, length 0.5 m
4xØ5 6
154
170
195
212
30 = 40 =
60 36 6
= =
62
Protected braking resistors

VW3 A58732 to VW3 A58734 VW3 A58735 to VW3 A58737
c a
8,75
7,5 = =
=
332
310
H
b
2xØ5
3xØ5,5
61 = =
=
85
= 77,5 =
VW3 a b c H
A58735 163 340 61 320
A58736, A58737 156 434 167 415
VW3 A66704
410 540
370
4xØ13
350 384
380 480

34
Altivar 31
Single phase chokes 3-phase chokes

VZ1 Lppppppp VW3 A66501 to VW3 A66506
b
H G 8xØ
c a
H G
c G1
c1 a
VZ1 a b c G H Ø VW3 a b c c1 G G1 H Ø
L004M010 60 100 80 50 44 4x9 A66501 100 135 55 60 40 60 42 6x9
L007UM50 60 100 95 50 60 4x9 A66502 130 155 85 90 60 80.5 62 6 x 12
L018UM20 85 120 105 70 70 5 x 11 A66503 130 155 85 90 60 80.5 62 6 x 12
A66504 155 170 115 135 75 107 90 6 x 12
A66505 180 210 125 165 85 122 105 6 x 12
A66506 275 210 130 160 105 181 100 11 x 22
Additional EMC input filters:

Mounting of filter underneath the drive Mounting of filter adjacent to drive
=
Ø Ø
b1
b
b
H
=
c = G = a c
a
VW3 a b b1 c G H Ø
A31401, A31402 72 185 – 50 60 121.5 2 x M4
A31403, A31404 105 185 – 60 93 121.5 2 x M4
A31405, A31406 140 225 – 60 126 157 4 x M4
A31407 180 275 – 60 160 210 4 x M4
A31408, A31409 245 365 – 60 295 225 4 x M5
Output filters Ferrite suppressors for downstream contactor opening

VW3 A58451 to VW3 A58453 VW3 A31451 to VW3 A31452
4xØ
b
c Ø a
H
b
c G
a
VW3 a b c G H Ø VW3 a b c Ø
A58451 169.5 340 123 150 315 7 A31451 33.5 33 33 13
A58452 A31452 33 21.5 22.5 9
A58453 239 467.5 139.5 212 444 7 A31453 30 19 19 6

35
Schemes, Variable speed drives
combinations 0
Altivar 31
ATV 31ppppM3X, ATV 31ppppN4, ATV 31ppppS6X ATV 31ppppM2

3-phase power supply Single phase power supply
5
1
Q1 Q1
6
2
KM1 S2 KM1
S2
1 Q2 2 T1 1 Q3 2 S1 A1 A2 1 Q2 2 T1 1 Q3 2 S1 A1 A2
3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6
Q2 Q2
A1 A1
1
1
3
KM1 KM1
KM1 R1A R1C 13 14 KM1 R1A R1C 13 14
4
2
(1) (1)
(3) (3)
(2) (2)
A1 A1
R1A
R1C
R1B
R2A
R2C
L1
L2
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
+ 24
L1
L2
L3
R1A
R1C
R1B
R2A
R2C
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
+ 24
CLI
CLI
PA/+
PA/+
COM
+ 10
COM
+ 10
AOC
AOV
AOC
AOV
PC/-
PC/-
AI1
AI3
AI2
AI1
AI3
AI2
PB
PB
P0
P0
W
W
V
U
X-Y mA X-Y mA
W1
W1
U1
V1
U1
V1
Braking Braking
Reference 0 ± 10 V resistor
Reference 0 ± 10 V
M resistor M potentiometer
potentiometer
3 3
SZ1 RV1202 SZ1 RV1202
(1) Line choke (single phase or 3-phase).

(2) Fault relay contacts. For remote signalling of drive status.
(3) Shared connection of the logic inputs depends on the position of a switch, see diagrams below.
Note: All terminals are located at the bottom of the drive.
Fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or connected on the same circuit, such as relays, contactors, solenoid valves, fluorescent
lighting, etc.
Compatible components (for full references, please consult our specialist catalogue).
Code Description
Q1 GV2 L or Compact NS (see pages 40 to 43)
KM1 LC1 ppp + LA4 DA2U (see pages 40 to 43)
S1, S2 XB2 B or XA2 B pushbuttons
T1 100 VA transformer 220 V secondary
Q2 GV2 L rated at twice the nominal primary current of T1
Q2 GB2 CB05
Examples of recommended circuit diagrams

Logic input switches AOC output
“Source” position “Sink” position CLI position with PLC transistor outputs Wired as logic output
ATV 31 control terminals
COM
COM
0V 24 V
AOC
CLI
CLI
LI1
LI1
0V
+ 24 V
COM
LI1
LI1
24 V
24 V
relay
10 mA
0V 0V 24 V
PLC PLC
2-wire control 3-wire control Analog voltage inputs Analog current input
± 10 V external ± 10 V external 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, X-Y mA
ATV 31 control terminals ATV 31 control terminals ATV 31 control terminals ATV 31 control terminals ATV 31 control terminals
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
AI1
0V
AI3
0V
AI2
0V
LI1
LI1
LI2
LIx
LIx
Speed Source
reference ± 10 V 0-20 mA
LI1: Forward LI1: Stop + 10 V potentiometer 4-20 mA
LIx: Reverse LI2: Forward 2.2 to 10 kΩ X-Y mA
LIx: Reverse
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Functions:

36
Schemes, Variable speed drives
connections, for asynchronous motors 0
mounting 0
Altivar 31
Electromagnetic compatibility
Schemes
Additional radio interference suppression input filters VW3 A3140p
3-phase power supply Single phase power supply
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
VW3 A3140 VW3 A3140
L'1
L'2
L'3
L'1
L'2
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
ATV 31 ATV 31
Connections to meet the requirements of EMC standards

Principle
b Grounds between the drive, motor and cable shielding must have “high frequency” equipotentiality.
b Use shielded cables with the shielding connected to ground throughout 360° at both ends for the motor cable, the braking resistor cable and
the control/command cables. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in continuity.
b Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable.
Installation diagram for ATV 31Hppp drives
1 Steel plate supplied with the drive, to be fitted on it (machine ground)

2 Altivar 31
3 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable
4 Non-shielded wires for the output of the safety relay contacts.
5 Fix and ground the shielding of cables 6, 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive:
- Strip the shielding.
- Use cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding
2
has been stripped, to attach them to the plate 1.
The shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure good
contact.
Cable clamps must be made from stainless steel.
6 Shielded cable for connecting the motor.
7 Shielded cable for connecting the control/command wiring. For applications
5
1 requiring several conductors, use cables with a small cross-section (0.5 mm2).
8 Shielded cable for connecting the braking resistor.
6, 7, 8, the shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. The shielding
must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal
cases.
9 Ground screw for the motor cable with low ratings, as the screw on the heatsink
is inaccessible.
3 4
8 7
9 6
Note: The HF equipotential ground connection between the drive, motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE protective conductors
(green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit.
If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted beneath the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable. Link 3 on the drive is then
via the filter output cable.
Operation on an IT system
IT system: isolated or impedance earthed neutral.
Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads, e.g. Merlin Gerin type XM200.
ATV 31pppM2 and N4 drives feature built-in RFI filters. There are two ways of isolating these filters from ground for operation on an IT system:
b ATV 31H018M2 to ATV 31HU22M2 and ATV 31H037N4 to ATV 31HU40N4, pull out a jumper to disconnect the filter.
b ATV 31HU55N4 to ATV 31HD15N4, move the cable tag to disconnect the filter.

37
Mounting Variable speed drives
and installation for asynchronous motors 0
recommendations 0
Altivar 31
Depending on the conditions in which the drive is to be used, its installation will
require certain precautions and the use of appropriate accessories.
Mounting recommendations for ATV 31H drives
Install the unit vertically, at ± 10°.
b Do not place it close to heating elements.
b Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can
circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit.
≥ 50 mm
≥d ≥d
≥ 50 mm
≥ 10 mm
Types of mounting
b Type A mounting
≥ 50 mm ≥ 50 mm
b Type B mounting
b Type C mounting
≥ 50 mm ≥ 50 mm
Removing the protective cover Removing the protective cover from the top of the drive (as shown opposite) changes
the degree of protection to IP 20.
Derating curves for the nominal drive current (In) as a function of the temperature,
switching frequency and type of mounting.
I / In In
100 %
-5%
- 10 % - 10 %
90 %
- 15 %
- 20 %
80 %
- 25 % 40°C Mounting types A and B
- 25 %
70 % - 30 %
- 35 % - 35 % 50°C Mounting type C

60 % - 40 %

50 % - 50 %
- 55 % 60°C Mounting type C

40 %

30 %
4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz
Switching frequency
For intermediate temperatures (e.g. 55°C), interpolate between 2 curves.

38
Mounting Variable speed drives
and installation for asynchronous motors 0
recommendations (continued) Altivar 31 0
Specific recommendations for mounting ATV 31 drives in a

wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure
Observe the mounting recommendations on the opposite page.
To ensure proper air circulation in the drive:
b Fit ventilation grilles.
b Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation. If there is not, install forced ventilation
with a filter. The openings and/or fans must provide a flow rate at least equal to that
of the drive fans (see the table below).
b Use special filters with IP 54 protection.
b Remove the protective cover from the top of the drive.
Fan flow rate depending on the drive rating

ATV 31 drive Flow rate m3/min
H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, H018M3X, 0.3
H037M3X, H055M3X, H037N4, H055N4,
H075N4, HU11N4, H075S6X, HU15N6X
H075M2, HU11M2, HU15M2, H075M3X, 0.55
HU11M3X, HU15M3X, HU15N4, HU22N4,
HU22S6X, HU40N6X
HU22M2, HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, 1.55
HU30N4, HU40N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X
HU55M3X, HU55N4, HU75N4, HD11S6X 1.7
HU75M3X, HD11M3X, HD11N4, HD15N4, 2.8
HD15S6X
HD15M3X 3.6
Dust and damp proof metal wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (IP 54

degree of protection)
The drive must be mounted in a dust and damp proof enclosure in certain
environmental conditions: dust, corrosive gases, high humidity with risk of
condensation and dripping water, splashing liquid, etc.
This enables the drive to be used in an enclosure where the maximum internal
temperature can reach 50°C.
Calculating the size of the enclosure

Maximum thermal resistance Rth (°C/W)
θ = maximum temperature inside enclosure in °C
θ° – θ e θe = maximum external temperature in °C
Rth = ------------------
P P = total power dissipated in the enclosure in W
Power dissipated by drive: see page 14.
Add the power dissipated by the other equipment components.
Useful heat dissipation surface of enclosure S (m2)

(sides + top + front panel if wall-mounted)
k
S = ---------- K = thermal resistance per m2 of enclosure.
Rth
For metal enclosures: K = 0.12 with internal fan, K = 0.15 without fan
Note: Do not use insulated enclosures as they have a poor level of conductivity.
Mounting recommendations for ATV 31 drives

≥ 100 mm

Do not place it close to heating elements.
Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can
circulate from the bottom to the top of the unit.
100 mm

39
Combinations for Variable speed drives
self-assembly 0
Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
The combinations suggested below can be used to assemble a complete motor
starter comprising a circuit-breaker, a contactor and an Altivar 31 variable speed
drive.
The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits, isolation, and
padlocking if required.
The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation of
the motor on stopping.
The Altivar 31 variable speed drive is electronically protected against short-circuits
between phases and between phase and earth; it therefore provides continuity of
service and thermal protection of the motor.
Motor starter for drive with heatsink
Variable speed Standard power Circuit-breaker (2) Max. Contactor (3)
521466
drive rating of 4-pole Reference Rating prosp. Add the voltage

Reference 50/60 Hz motors line Isc number to the basic
(1) reference to obtain the
full reference (4)
kW HP A kA
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V
ATV 31H018M2 0.18 0.25 GV2 L08 4 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31H037M2 0.37 0.5 GV2 L10 6.3 1 LC1 K0610
803714
ATV 31H055M2 0.55 0.75 GV2 L14 10 1 LC1 K0610

ATV 31H075M2 0.75 1 GV2 L14 10 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU11M2 1.1 1.5 GV2 L16 14 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU15M2 1.5 2 GV2 L20 18 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU22M2 2.2 3 GV2 L22 25 1 LC1 D09
3-phase supply voltage: 200…240 V
ATV 31H018M3X 0.18 0.25 GV2 L07 2.5 5 LC1 K0610
531250
ATV 31H037M3X 0.37 0.5 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610

ATV 31H055M3X 0.55 0.75 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31H075M3X 0.75 1 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU11M3X 1.1 1.5 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU15M3X 1.5 2 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU22M3X 2.2 3 GV2 L20 18 5 LC1 K0610
GV2 L
+ ATV 31HU30M3X 3 – GV2 L22 25 5 LC1 D09
LC1 K ATV 31HU40M3X 4 5 GV2 L22 25 5 LC1 D09
+ ATV 31HU55M3X 5.5 7.5 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32
ATV 31Hpppppp ATV 31HU75M3X 7.5 10 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32
ATV 31HD11M3X 11 15 NS80HMA 80 22 LC1 D40
ATV 31HD15M3X 15 20 NS100HMA 100 22 LC1 D40
ATV 31H037N4 0.37 0.5 GV2 L07 2.5 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31H055N4 0.55 0.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31H075N4 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU11N4 1.1 1.5 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU15N4 1.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU22N4 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU30N4 3 – GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU55N4 5.5 7.5 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 D09
ATV 31HU75N4 7.5 10 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D18
ATV 31HD11N4 11 15 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32
ATV 31HD15N4 15 20 NS80HMA 50 22 LC1 D32
(1) The HP values given are NEC-compliant (National Electrical Code).
(2) NS80HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand.
(3) Composition of contactors
LC1-K06: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact
LC1-D09/D32/D40: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact
(4) Usual control circuit voltages.
a.c. control circuit
Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240
LC1-D 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6
50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240
LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, or d.c. control circuit, please consult your Regional
Sales Office.
40
self-assembly 0
Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
drive.
The circuit-breaker provides protection against accidental short-circuits, isolation,
and padlocking if required.
The contactor provides control and management of any safety features and isolation
of the motor on stopping.
Motor starter for drive with heatsink
Variable speed Standard power Circuit-breaker (2) Max. Contactor (3)
521466

full reference (4)
kW HP A kA
ATV 31H075S6X 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU15S6X 1.5 2 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610
803714
ATV 31HU22S6X 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610

ATV 31HU40S6X 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU55S6X 5.5 7.5 GV2 L20 18 22 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HU75S6X 7.5 10 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 K0610
ATV 31HD11S6X 11 15 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D09
ATV 31HD15S6X 15 20 NS80HMA 32 22 LC1 D09
531250
(2) NS80HMA: product sold under the Merlin Gerin brand.

(3) Composition of contactors
LC1-K06: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact
LC1-D09/D32/D40: 3 poles + 1 "N/O" auxiliary contact
Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240
GV2 L
+ LC1-D 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5
LC1 K 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6
+ 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
ATV 31Hpppppp Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240
LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
Sales Office.
41
self-assembly 0 for asynchronous motors 0
Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
drive.
Motor starter for customisable enclosed drive
Variable speed Standard power Circuit-breaker Max. Contactor
521466

full reference (2)
kW HP A kA
ATV 31C018M2 0.18 0.25 GV2 L08 4 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31C037M2 0.37 0.5 GV2 L10 6.3 1 LC1 K0610
803714
ATV 31C055M2 0.55 0.75 GV2 L14 10 1 LC1 K0610

ATV 31C075M2 0.75 1 GV2 L14 10 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU11M2 1.1 1.5 GV2 L16 14 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU15M2 1.5 2 GV2 L20 18 1 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU22M2 2.2 3 GV2 L22 25 1 LC1 D09
ATV 31C037N4 0.37 0.5 GV2 L07 2.5 5 LC1 K0610
531252
ATV 31C055N4 0.55 0.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610

ATV 31C075N4 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU11N4 1.1 1.5 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU15N4 1.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU22N4 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU30N4 3 3 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31CU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
GV2 L
+ Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240
LC1 K LC1-D 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5
+ 60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6
ATV 31Cppppp 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240
LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
Sales Office.
42
self-assembly 0 for asynchronous motors 0
Altivar 31
Motor starters
Applications
drive.
Motor starter for drive kit
Variable speed Standard power Circuit-breaker Max. Contactor
full reference (2)
kW HP A kA
ATV 31K018M2 0.18 0.25 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31K037M2 0.37 0.5 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31K055M2 0.55 0.75 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31K075M2 0.75 1 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU11M2 1.1 1.5 GV2 L14 14 22 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU15M2 1.5 2 GV2 L20 18 22 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU22M2 2.2 3 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 D09
ATV 31K037N4 0.37 0.5 GV2 L07 2.5 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31K055N4 0.55 0.75 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31K075N4 0.75 1 GV2 L08 4 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU11N4 1.1 1.5 GV2 L10 6.3 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU15N4 1.5 2 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU22N4 2.2 3 GV2 L14 10 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU30N4 3 3 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU40N4 4 5 GV2 L16 14 5 LC1 K0610
ATV 31KU55N4 5.5 7.5 GV2 L22 25 22 LC1 D09
ATV 31KU75N4 7.5 10 GV2 L32 32 22 LC1 D18
ATV 31KD11N4 11 15 NS80 HMA 50 22 LC1 D32
ATV 31KD15N4 15 20 NS80 HMA 50 22 LC1 D32
Volts a 24 48 110 220 230 240
LC1-D 50 Hz B5 E5 F5 M5 P5 U5
60 Hz B6 E6 F6 M6 – U6
50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
Volts a 24 48 110 220/230 230 230/240
LC1-K 50/60 Hz B7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7
Sales Office.
43
Functions 0
Altivar 31
Summary of functions
563712
Drive factory setting page 45

Functions of the display and keys page 45
Remote display terminal option page 46
Menu access levels page 46
Menu access code page 46
Operating speed range page 46
Acceleration and deceleration ramp times page 46
Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile page 47
Ramp switching page 47
Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp page 48
Voltage/frequency ratio page 48
Auto-tuning page 48
Switching frequency, noise reduction page 48
PowerSuite for PC welcome screen Skip frequencies page 49
Speed reference page 49
Analog inputs page 49
Preset speeds page 49
+/- speed page 50
Save reference page 50
Step by step (JOG) page 51
Control and reference channels page 51
Reference switching page 51
Summing inputs page 51
563713
PI regulator page 52
Spooling page 52
Current limit switching page 53
Limiting low speed operating time page 53
Motor switching page 53
Control mode switching page 53
2-wire control page 54
3-wire control page 54
Forced local mode page 54
Freewheel stop page 54
Fast stop page 54
DC injection stop page 54
Brake control page 55
Management of limit switch page 55
Monitoring page 55
PowerSuite for Pocket PC
Fault management page 56
identification screen
Fault reset page 56
General reset (resets all faults) page 56
Controlled stop on loss of line supply page 56
Stop mode in the event of a fault page 56
Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection page 57
Automatic restart page 57
Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage page 57
Fault relay, unlocking page 57
Operating time reset to zero page 57
Motor thermal protection page 58
Drive thermal protection page 58
R1, R2 relay configuration page 58
AOC/AOV analog outputs page 59
Saving and retrieving the configuration page 59
Function compatibility table page 59
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

44
Functions (continued) 0
Altivar 31
Drive factory setting

The drive is supplied ready for use in most applications, with the following functions
and settings:
b Nominal motor frequency: 50 Hz

b Motor voltage: 230 V (ATV 31HpppM2 and M3X), 400 V (ATV 31HpppN4) or
600 V (ATV 31HpppS6X)
b Linear ramp times: 3 seconds
b Low speed (LSP): 0 Hz, high speed (HSP): 50 Hz
b Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp
b Stop mode in the event of a fault: Freewheel
b Motor thermal current = nominal drive current
b Standstill injection braking current = 0.7 x nominal drive current, for 0.5 seconds
b Constant torque operation, with sensorless flux vector control
b Logic inputs:
v 2 directions of operation (LI1, LI2), 2-wire control
v 4 preset speeds (LI3, LI4): LSP (low speed), 10 Hz, 15 Hz, 20 Hz
b Analog inputs:
v AI1 speed reference (0 +10 V)
v AI2 (0 ± 10 V) summing of AI1
v AI3 (4-20 mA) not configured
b Relay R1: fault relay
b Relay R2: not assigned
b Analog output AOC: 0-20 mA, image of the motor frequency
b Automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of excessive braking
b Switching frequency 4 kHz, random frequency
Functions of the display and keys
1 5
4
2
3
6
7
8
1 Information is displayed in the form of codes or values in four "7-segment"

displays
2 Buttons for scrolling through the menus or modifying values
3 “ENT”: Validation button for entering a menu or confirming the new value selected
4 “ESC”: Button for exiting the menus (no confirmation)
5 2 diagnostic LEDs for the CANopen bus
b For ATV 31HppppM2A, ATV 31HpppM3XA and ATV 31HpppN4A drives only:
6 Speed reference potentiometer
7 “RUN”: Local control of motor operation
8 STOP/RESET: Controls motor stopping locally and resets any faults

45
Altivar 31
b Remote display terminal option

563220
The remote display terminal can be mounted on the door of a wall-fixing or floor-
standing enclosure.
It comprises an LCD display with programming and control keys and a switch for
locking access to the menus.
Drive control keys
v “FWD/RV”: reversal of the direction of rotation
ESC
v “RUN”: motor run command
ENT v “STOP/RESET”: motor stop command or fault reset
stop
reset
The speed reference is given by the remote display terminal. Only the freewheel, fast
FWO
RUN stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the
REV
drive/operator terminal link is broken, the drive locks in fault mode.

Its subsequent action depends on the control and reference channel programming.
Remote display terminal
Note: Protection via customer confidential code has priority over the switch.
b Menu access levels

There are 3 access levels:
Level 1: Access to standard functions. Significantly, this level is interchangeable with
the Altivar 28.
Level 2: Access to advanced application functions.
Level 3: Access to advanced application functions and management of mixed control
modes.
b Menu access code

Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code.
When access is locked using a code, only the adjustment and monitoring parameters
can be accessed.
b Operating speed range

Used to determine the 2 frequency limits which define the speed range permitted by
the machine under actual operating conditions for all applications with or without
overspeed.
f (Hz)
HSP
LSP
Reference
0V 10 V
x mA y mA
4 mA 20 mA
LSP: low speed, from 0 to HSP, factory setting 0

HSP: high speed, from LSP to f max., factory setting 50 Hz
x: configurable between 0 and 20 mA, factory setting 4 mA
y: configurable between 4 and 20 mA, factory setting 20 mA
b Acceleration and deceleration ramp times

563714
Used to define acceleration and deceleration ramp times according to the application
and the machine dynamics.
f (Hz) f (Hz)
50 50
0 t 0 t
t1 t2
Linear acceleration ramp Linear deceleration ramp

Ramp adjustment with PowerSuite for PC
t1: acceleration time
t2: deceleration time
t1 and t2 can be set independently between 0.1 and 999.9 s, factory setting: 3 s

46
Altivar 31
b Acceleration and deceleration ramp profile

Used to gradually increase the output frequency starting from a speed reference,
following a linear ratio or a preset ratio.
- For applications such as material handling, packaging, transportation of people:
the use of S ramps takes up mechanical play and eliminates jolts, and limits “non-
following” of speed during rapid transient operation of high inertia machines.
- For pumping applications (installation with centrifugal pump and non-return
valve): valve closing can be controlled more accurately if U ramps are used.
- Selecting “linear”, “S”, “U” or customized profiles will affect both the acceleration
and deceleration ramps.
S ramps U ramps Customized ramps
f (Hz) f (Hz) f (Hz) f (Hz) f (Hz) f (Hz)
HSP HSP HSP HSP HSP HSP
0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
t2 t2 t2 t2 tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4
t1 t1 t1 t1 ACC or AC2 dEC or dE2
HSP: high speed HSP: high speed HSP: high speed

t1: ramp time set t1: ramp time set tA1: can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2)
t2 = 0.6 x t1 t2 = 0.5 x t1 tA2: can be set between 0 and (100% - tA1) (of ACC or AC2)
The curve coefficient is fixed. The curve coefficient is fixed. tA3: can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2)
tA4: can be set between 0 and (100% - tA3) (of dEC or dE2)
ACC: acceleration ramp 1 time
AC2: acceleration ramp 2 time
dEC: deceleration ramp 1 time
dE2: deceleration ramp 2 time
b Ramp switching
Used to switch 2 acceleration or deceleration ramp times, which can be adjusted
separately.
Ramp switching can be enabled by:
v a logic input
v a frequency threshold
v a combination of logic input and frequency threshold
Function suitable for:

- material handling with smooth starting and approach
- machines with fast steady state speed correction
f(Hz)
HSP
dE2
AC2
ACC dEC
t
Forward
1
or
Reverse 0 t
1
LI4 0 t
Acceleration 1 (ACC) and deceleration 1 (dEC):

- adjustment 0.1 to 999.9 s
- factory setting 3 s
Acceleration 2 (AC2) and deceleration 2 (dE2):
- adjustment 0.1 to 999.9 s
- factory setting 5 s
HSP: high speed
Example of switching using logic input LI4

47
Altivar 31
b Automatic adaptation of deceleration ramp

Used to automatically adapt the deceleration ramp if the initial setting is too low when
the load inertia is taken into account. This function avoids the drive locking in the
event of an excessive braking fault.
Function suitable for all applications not requiring precise stopping and not using
braking resistors.
Automatic adaptation must be cancelled if the machine has position control with
stopping on a ramp and a braking resistor installed. This function is automatically
disabled if the brake sequence is configured.
b Voltage/frequency ratio
563715
v Motor and power supply characteristics

Used to determine the limit values for the voltage/frequency ratio according to the
line supply, the motor and the application.
The following values should be set for variable or constant torque applications with
or without overspeed:
- the base frequency corresponding to the supply
- the nominal motor frequency (in Hz) given on the motor rating plate
- the nominal motor voltage (in V) given on the motor rating plate
- the maximum output frequency of the drive (in Hz)
v Type of voltage/frequency ratio
Used to adapt the voltage/frequency ratio to the application in order to optimize
performance for the following applications:
Adjustment of the voltage/frequency ratio with
v Constant torque applications (machines with average loads operating at low
PowerSuite for PC speed) with motors connected in parallel or special motors (e.g.: resistive cage motor):
ratio L
v Variable torque applications (pumps, fans): ratio P
v Machines with heavy loads operating at low speed, machines with fast cycles, with
(sensorless) flux vector control: ratio n
v Energy saving, for machines with slow speed and torque variations: ratio nLd
Voltage is automatically reduced to a minimum according to the necessary torque
U (V)
Un
L
n
P
f (Hz)
frn
Un: Nominal motor voltage
frn: Nominal motor frequency
b Auto-tuning
Auto-tuning may be performed:
v voluntarily by the operator using dialogue tools via local control mode or the serial
link
v each time the drive is switched on
v on each run command
v by enabling a logic input
Auto-tuning is used to optimize application performance.
b Switching frequency, noise reduction

The switching frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the
motor.
The switching frequency is modulated randomly in order to avoid resonance. This
function can be disabled if it causes instability.
High frequency switching of the intermediate DC voltage can be used to supply the
motor with a current wave that has a lower harmonic distortion. The switching
frequency can be adjusted during operation to reduce the noise generated by the
motor.
Value: 2 to 16 kHz, with a factory setting of 4 kHz.
For all applications which require low motor noise.

48
Altivar 31
b Skip frequencies
563716
Used to suppress one or two critical speeds which may be the cause of mechanical
resonance.
It is possible to prohibit the prolonged operation of the motor on 1 or 2 frequency
bands (with a bandwidth of ± 1 Hz), which can be set within the operating range.
Function suitable for lightweight machines, bulk product conveyors with unbalanced
motor, fans and centrifugal pumps.
f (Hz)
2 Hz
Reference
Motor speed change depending on the skip frequency reference
Adjustment of the skip frequency with

PowerSuite for Pocket PC b Speed reference
The speed reference can have different sources depending on the drive
configuration:
v references provided by 3 analog inputs
v the potentiometer reference (for ATV 31pppA drives only)
v the +/- speed function via logic input, using the keypad or remote terminal keys
v the remote display terminal reference
v speed references provided by the communication bus or networks
These different sources are managed by programming the reference functions and
channels.
b Analog inputs
There are 3 analog inputs:
v 2 voltage inputs:
- 0-10 V (AI1)
- ± 10 V (AI2)
v 1 current input:
- X-Y mA (AI3) where X is configurable between 0 and 20 mA, and Y is
configurable between 4 and 20 mA.
b Preset speeds
563717
Used to switch preset speed references.

2, 4, 8 or 16 preset speeds can be selected.
Enabled by means of 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs.
The preset speeds can be adjusted in increments of 0.1 Hz from 0 Hz to 500 Hz.
Function suitable for material handling and machines with several operating speeds.
f (Hz)
20 The speed obtained with inputs
15 LI3 and LI4 at state 0 is LSP or the
10 speed reference, depending on
the level of analog inputs AI1, AI2
LSP and AI3.
Factory settings:
t 1st speed: LSP (low speed or
Forward 1 speed reference)
Adjustment of preset speeds with PowerSuite for PC or
Reverse LI2 0 2nd speed: 10 Hz
t
3rd speed: 15 Hz
1
4th speed: 20 Hz (high speed)
LI3 0
t
LI4 0 t
Example of operation with 4 preset speeds and 2 logic inputs

49
Altivar 31
b +/- speed
563718
Used to increase or decrease a speed reference by means of 1 or 2 logic inputs, with

or without the last reference being saved (motorised potentiometer function).
This function is suitable for centralised control of a machine with several sections
operating in one direction or for control by a pendant control station of a handling
crane with two operating directions.
Two types of operation are available:

v Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the
operating direction(s).
The input assigned to the "+ speed" command increases the speed, the input
assigned to the "- speed" command decreases the speed.
f (Hz)
HSP
Adjustment of the +/- speed function with PowerSuite for PC
LSP t
Forward 1
or
Reverse 0 t
1
+ speed 0 t
- speed 0 t
Example of "+/- speed" with 2 logic inputs, single action buttons and reference saving
v Use of double action buttons (only one logic input assigned to “+ speed” is
necessary):
Logic inputs:
Forward Reverse “+ speed” Released 1st press 2nd press
(- speed) (speed (+ speed)
maintained)
a b c d Forward – a a and b
button
a and b: 1st press Reverse – c c and d
c and d: 2nd press button
f (Hz)
HSP
LSP
0
LSP
t
HSP
Forward operation
2nd press b b
1st press a a a a a a a
0 t
Reverse operation
2nd press
d
1st press
0 c c
t
LSP: low speed, HSP: high speed

Example with double action buttons and 1 logic input
Note: This type of “+/- speed” control is incompatible with 3-wire control
b Save reference
This function is associated with “+/- speed” control.
Enables the reading and saving of the last speed reference prior to the loss of the
run signal or mains supply. The saved reference is applied at the next run signal.

50
Altivar 31
f (Hz) b Step by step (JOG)

Used for pulse operation with minimum ramp times (0.1 s), limited speed reference
and minimum time between 2 pulses.
t Enabled by a logic input and pulses given by the operating direction command.
tm
Forward 1 This function is suitable for machines with product insertion in manual mode
or
Reverse 0 t (example: gradual movement of the mechanism during maintenance operations).
1 b Control and reference channels

JOG 0 t There are several control and reference channels which can be independent.
Speed reference: tm: fixed time of 0.5 s, minimum time
Commands (forward, reverse, etc.) and speed references can be sent using the
can be adjusted from 0 to 10 Hz between 2 pulses following methods:
factory setting 10 Hz v terminals (logic and analog inputs)
v keypad for ATV 31pppA only (RUN/STOP and potentiometer)
Example of jog operation v ATV 31 keypad
v via the serial link
- remote display terminal
- Modbus control word
- CANopen control word
The control and speed reference channels can be separate.

Example: speed reference issued by CANopen and commands issued by the remote
display terminal.
Note: The STOP keys on the keypad and the remote display terminal may retain priority.
The “summing inputs” and “PI regulator” functions only apply to one reference channel.
b Reference switching
Switching between 2 speed references can be enabled via:
f (Hz) v a logic input
AI1 v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word
Reference 1 is active if the logic input (or control word bit) is at 0, reference 2 is active
if the logic input (or control word bit) is at 1.
AI2
The reference can be switched with the motor running.
t
Forward
COM
+10
or 1
AI1
AI2
AI3
LIx
Reverse 0 t
±10 V X-Y
1 (X is adjustable from 0 to 20 mA
t + 24 V 0 and Y is adjustable from 4 to 20 mA)
LIx 0
Example of reference switching Connection diagram for reference switching
b Summing inputs
Used to add up 2 or 3 speed references from different sources.
The references to be added together are selected from all the possible types of
speed reference.
Example:
Reference 1 sent by AI1
Reference 2 sent by AI2
Reference 3 sent by AIP
Drive speed reference: reference 1 + reference 2 + reference 3.

51
Altivar 31
Ramp + b PI regulator
PIC
X–1
PI inversion Used for simple control of a flow rate or a pressure with a sensor which supplies a
PI feedback signal adapted to the drive.
Feed- This function is suitable for pumping and ventilation applications.
back
FBS RPG PI regulator
RIG v PI reference:
Multiplier - internal regulator reference, adjustable from 0 to 100
X
- regulation reference selected from all the possible types of regulation reference
Ramp if PSP = 0
- preset PI references
Ramp v 2 or 4 preset PI references, adjustable from 0 to 100, require the use of 1 or 2
Auto HSP
ACC Reference logic inputs respectively
Man LSP DEC v Manual reference
Manual reference - speed reference selected from all the possible types of speed reference
Auto/man v PI feedback:
- analog input AI1, AI2 or AI3
ACC: Acceleration
DEC: Deceleration
v Auto/Man:
FBS: PI feedback multiplication coefficient - logic input LI for switching operation to speed reference (Man) or PI
HSP: High speed regulation (Auto).
PIC: Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI During operation in automatic mode it is possible to adapt the process feedback, to
regulator correct inverse PI, to adjust the proportional and integral gain and to apply a ramp
LSP: Low speed
RIG: PI regulator integral gain
(time = ACC - DEC) for establishing the PI action on starting and stopping.
RPG: PI regulator proportional gain The motor speed is limited to between LSP and HSP.
Note: The PI function is incompatible with the “preset speeds” and “step by step (JOG)”
PI regulator functions. The PI reference can also be transmitted on line via the Modbus RS 485 serial link or
via the CANopen bus.
b Spooling (Function only available with ATV 31ppppT drives)

Function for winding reels of thread (in textile applications)
Spooling Winding drive
drive
Reel of thread
Main
Gearbox
shaft
Motor
Thread
Thread
guide
Gearbox
Motor Cam
The cam speed of rotation must follow a precise profile to ensure steady winding.
RUN command t
LI or bit
Wiring check trC t
Motor Ramp 0.1 s
qSH
speed Ramp dEC

Ramp ACC
Base reference + trH
trH
Base reference + trH - qSH

Base reference
trL
Base reference - trL + qsL

Base reference - trL
qSL
Ramp 0.1 s
Start of function
End of function
t
When the function is configured, the ramp type is forced to linear ramp.

52
Altivar 31
b Current limit switching

563719
A 2nd current limit can be configured between 0.25 and 1.5 times the nominal drive
current.
Used to limit the torque and the temperature rise of the motor.
Switching between 2 current limits can be enabled via:
v a logic input
v a bit in a Modbus or CANopen control word
b Limiting low speed operating time

The motor is stopped automatically after an operating period at low speed (LSP) with
zero reference and run command present.
This time can be set between 0.1 and 999.9 seconds
(0 corresponds to an unlimited time).
Factory setting 0 s. The motor restarts automatically on the ramp when the reference
reappears or if the run command is broken and then re-established.
Configuration of current switching with PowerSuite for PC This function is suitable for automatic stopping/starting on pressure-regulated
pumps.
b Motor switching
Allows two motors with different powers to be supplied successively by the same
drive. Switching must take place with the drive stopped and locked, using an
appropriate sequence at the drive output.
The function can be used to adapt the motor parameters. The following parameters
are switched automatically:
v nominal motor voltage
v nominal motor frequency
v nominal motor current
v nominal motor speed
v motor cosine Phi
v selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2
v IR compensation, motor 2
v motor frequency loop gain
v motor stability
v motor slip compensation
Motor thermal protection is disabled by this function.
Motor switching can be enabled by:
v a logic input
With hoisting applications, this function enables a single drive to be used for vertical
and horizontal movements.
b Control mode switching

Control channel switching provides a choice of 2 operating modes.
Switching can be enabled by:
v a logic input

53
Altivar 31
b 2-wire control
Used to control the direction of operation by means of a maintained contact.
Enabled by means of 1 or 2 logic inputs (one or two directions).
This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications.
3 operating modes are possible:
v detection of the state of the logic inputs
v detection of a change in state of the logic inputs
v detection of the state of the logic inputs with forward operation always having priority
over reverse
Altivar 31 control terminals

LI1: Forward
24 V LI1 LIx LIx: Reverse
f (Hz) Wiring diagram for 2-wire control
0 t b 3-wire control
Used to control the operating direction and stopping by means of pulsed contacts.
Stop 1 Enabled by means of 2 or 3 logic inputs (non-reversing or reversing).
0 t This function is suitable for all non-reversing and reversing applications.
1
Forward Altivar 31 control terminals LI1: Stop
0 t LI1 LI2 LIx LI2: Forward
24 V
LIx: Reverse
1
Reverse 0 t
Example of operation with 3-wire control Wiring diagram for 3-wire control
b Forced local mode

Forced local mode imposes control via the terminals or operator terminal and prohibits
all other control modes.
The following references and commands are available for forced local mode:
v references AI1, or AI2, or AI3 and control via logic inputs
v reference and control via RUN/STOP keys and potentiometer (ATV 31pppA drives
only)
v reference and control via the remote display terminal
The changeover to forced local mode is enabled by a logic input.
b Freewheel stop
563720
Stops the motor by resistive torque only if the motor power supply is cut.
A freewheel stop is achieved:
v by configuring a normal stop command as a freewheel stop (on disappearance of
a run command or appearance of a stop command)
b Fast stop
Used to achieve a braked stop with an acceptable deceleration ramp time (divided by
2 to 10) for the drive/motor unit to avoid locking on an excessive braking fault.
Used for conveyors with emergency stop electrical braking.
A fast stop is achieved:
v by configuring a normal stop as a fast stop (on disappearance of a run command
or appearance of a stop command)
Configuration of stop types with b DC injection stop

Used to brake (at low speed) high inertia fans, or to maintain torque on stopping in
the case of fans located in an airflow.
A DC injection stop is achieved:
v by configuring a normal stop as a DC injection stop (on disappearance of a run
command or appearance of a stop command)
The DC value and the standstill braking time are adjustable.

54
Altivar 31
Speed reference b Brake control

Used to manage control of an electromagnetic brake in synchronization with the
starting and stopping of the motor to avoid jolts and load veering.
0 t
Relay or logic output
The brake control sequence is managed by the drive.
Values that can be adjusted for releasing the brake: current threshold and time delay
1
Values that can be adjusted for engaging the brake: frequency threshold and time
0 t
t1 delay
Motor current
T Enabled: by relay logic output R2 or logic output AOC assigned to brake control.
Brake release
Function suitable for material handling applications with movements equipped with
current electromagnetic brakes (hoisting) and machines requiring a parking brake
0 t
(unbalanced machines).
t2
Speed reference v Principle:
Brake engage - Vertical lifting movement:
frequency Maintain motor torque in an upward direction when the brake is being released and
0 t engaged, in order to hold the load, and start smoothly as soon as the brake is
LI forward or
reverse released.
1
- Horizontal lifting movement:
0 t
State of Engaged Released Engaged
Synchronizes brake release with the build-up torque on starting and brake engage at
brake zero speed on stopping, in order to prevent jerking.
Accessible settings: Recommended settings for brake control for a vertical lifting application (for a
t1: Brake release time delay horizontal lifting application set the current threshold to zero):
t2: Brake engage time delay
- Brake release current: Adjust the brake release current to the nominal current
Brake control indicated on the motor. If, during testing, the torque is insufficient, increase the brake
release current (the maximum value is imposed by the drive).
- Acceleration time: For lifting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration
ramps to more than 0.5 seconds. Ensure that the drive does not change to current
limiting.
The same recommendation applies for deceleration.
Note: For a lifting movement, a braking resistor should be used. Ensure that the
settings and configurations selected cannot cause a drop or a loss of control of the
lifted load.
- Brake release time delay t1: Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time
563721
required for the mechanical brake to release.

- Brake engage frequency: Set to twice the nominal slip then adjust according to
the result.
- Brake engage time delay t2: Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time
required for the mechanical brake to engage.
b Management of limit switch

Used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches (with 1 or 2 operating
directions).
Each limit (forward, reverse) is associated with a logic input. The type of stop that
occurs on detection of a limit can be configured as normal, freewheel or fast.
Following a stop, the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only.
b Monitoring
Monitoring the different parameters with PowerSuite The following data can be displayed:
for PC v frequency reference
v internal PI reference
v frequency reference (absolute value)
563722
v output frequency applied to the motor (value signed in two’s complement)

v output value in customer units
v current in the motor
v motor power: 100% = nominal power
v line voltage
v motor thermal state:
100%: nominal thermal state, 118%: motor overload threshold
v drive thermal state:
100%: nominal thermal state, 118%: drive overload threshold
v motor torque: 100% = nominal torque
v last fault
v operating time
v auto-tuning status
Monitoring the different parameters with the v configuration and state of logic inputs
oscilloscope function in PowerSuite for PC v configuration of analog inputs

55
Altivar 31
b Fault management
563723
There are different modes of operation on a resettable fault:

v Freewheel stop
v The drive switches to the fallback speed
v The drive maintains the speed at which it was operating when the fault occurred
until the fault disappears
v Stop on ramp
v Fast stop
The detected resettable faults are as follows:
v drive overheating
v motor overheating
v CANopen bus fault
v Modbus serial link failure
v external faults
Fault management with PowerSuite for PC v loss of 4-20 mA signal
b Fault reset
Used to clear the last fault by means of a logic input.
The restart conditions after a reset to zero are the same as those of a normal
power-up.
Resets the following faults: overvoltage, overspeed, external fault, drive overheating,
motor phase loss, DC bus overvoltage, loss of 4-20 mA reference, load veering,
motor overload if the thermal state is less than 100%, serial link fault.
"Line supply undervoltage" and "line supply phase loss" faults are reset automatically
when the line supply is restored.
Function suitable for applications where the drives are difficult to access, for example
on moving parts in material handling systems.
b General reset (resets all faults)

This function can be used to inhibit all faults, including thermal protection (forced
operation) and may cause irreparable damage to the drive.
Function suitable for applications where a restart can be vital (conveyor in a furnace,
smoke extraction station, machine with hardening products which need to be
removed).
The function is enabled by a logic input.
Fault monitoring is active if the logic input is at state 1.
All faults are reset on a change of state of the logic input.
b Controlled stop on loss of line supply

Used to control motor stopping on a loss of line supply.
Function suitable for material handling, machines with high inertia, continuous
product processing machines.
Type of stop possible:
v locking of the drive and freewheel stop
v stop which uses the mechanical inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long
as possible
v stop on ramp
v fast stop (depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive)
b Stop mode in the event of a fault

The type of stop that occurs on detection of a fault can be configured as normal,
freewheel or fast for the following faults:
v external fault (detection enabled by a logic input or a bit in a Modbus or CANopen
control word)
v motor phase loss fault
If a downstream contactor is being used between the drive and the motor, the motor
phase loss fault should be inhibited.

56
Altivar 31
b Automatic catching a spinning load with speed detection (“catch on the fly”)
Used to restart the motor smoothly after one of the following events, provided the run
command is still present:
v loss of line supply or simple switch off
v fault reset or automatic restart
v freewheel stop
On disappearance of the event, the effective speed of the motor is detected in order
to restart on a ramp at this speed and return to the reference speed. The speed
detection time can be up to 1 s depending on the initial deviation.
This function is automatically disabled if the brake sequence is configured.
This function is suitable for machines where the speed loss is negligible during the
time over which the mains supply is lost (machines with high inertia), fans and pumps
driven by residual flow, etc.
b Automatic restart
Enables the drive to be restarted automatically after locking following a fault if this
fault has disappeared and if the other operating conditions permit a restart.
This restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly
longer wait periods of 1 s, 5 s, 10 s then 1 minute for the rest.
The whole restart procedure can last anywhere from 5 minutes to an unlimited time.
If the drive has not restarted after the configured time, it will lock and the procedure
is abandoned until it has been switched off and on again.
The faults permitting this restart are:

v line supply overvoltage
v motor thermal overload
v drive thermal overload
v DC bus overvoltage
v failure of a line supply phase
v external fault
v loss of 4-20 mA reference
v CANopen bus fault
v Modbus serial link fault
v line supply voltage too low. For this fault, the function is always active, even if it is
not configured.
For these types of fault, the relay configured as a fault relay remains activated if the
function is configured. The speed reference and the direction of operation must be
maintained for this function.
This function is suitable for machines or installations in continuous operation or
without monitoring, and where a restart will not endanger equipment or personnel in
any way.
b Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage

The line voltage monitoring threshold is lowered to 50% of the motor voltage.
In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be
guaranteed.
b Fault relay, unlocking

563724
The fault relay is energised when the drive is powered up and is not faulty.
It contains a “C/O” common point contact.
The drive can be unlocked after a fault in one of the following ways:
v by powering down until the “ON” LED extinguishes, then switching the power
back on
v by assigning a logic input to the “reset faults” function
v by the “automatic restart” function, if it has been configured
b Operating time reset to zero

The drive operating time can be reset to zero.
Configuration of the fault relay with


57
Altivar 31
b Motor thermal protection

Indirect motor thermal protection is implemented via continuous calculation of its
theoretical temperature rise.
Thermal protection can be adjusted from 0.2 to 1.5 times the nominal drive current.
This function is suitable for applications with self-cooled motors.
t 13 5 10 20 50 Hz
10 000
( 2 h 45)
Trip time in seconds

1 000
( 16 mn)
100
0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6
Motor current/ItH
Motor thermal protection curves
b Drive thermal protection

Thermal protection, by a PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power
module, ensures that the drive is protected in the event of poor ventilation or
excessive ambient temperatures.
Locks the drive in the event of a fault.
t
5000
3000
Trip time in seconds
1000
200
160
100
60
2
0
1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,8 1,9 Motor current/Drive In
b R1/R2 relay configuration

The following states are signalled when the relay is powered on:
v drive fault
v drive running
v frequency threshold reached
v high speed reached
v current threshold reached
v frequency reference reached
v motor thermal threshold reached
v brake sequence (R2 only)

58
Altivar 31
b AOC/AOV analog output

563725
The same data is available on analog outputs AOC and AOV.

The following assignments are possible:
v motor current
v motor frequency
v motor torque
v power supplied by the drive
v drive fault
v frequency threshold reached
v high speed reached
v current threshold reached
v frequency reference reached
v motor thermal threshold reached
v brake sequence
Configuration of AOC/AOV outputs with PowerSuite for PC The adjustment of analog output AOC/AOV is used to modify the characteristics of
the current analog output AOC or the voltage analog output AOV.
AOC: can be set as 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
AOV: can be set at 0-10 V
b Saving and retrieving the configuration

A configuration can be saved to the EEPROM. This function is used to store a
configuration in addition to the current configuration.
Retrieving this configuration clears the current configuration.
Function compatibility table

b Configurable I/O
Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible.
Stop functions have priority over run commands.
The selection of functions is limited:
- by the number of drive I/O
- by the incompatibility of certain functions with one another
Functions Summing +/- speed Manage- Preset PI Jog Brake DC Fast stop Freewheel
inputs ment of speeds regulator operation sequence injection stop
limit switch stop
Summing inputs
A A
+/- speed
Management of limit switch
Preset speeds
X A
PI regulator
Jog operation
X X
Brake sequence
DC injection stop
A
Fast stop
A
Freewheel stop
X X
Incompatible functions Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time)
Compatible functions X The arrow indicates which function has priority
Not applicable A Example: the "Freewheel stop" function has priority over the "Fast stop" function

59
Schneider Electric worldwide 0
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Afghanistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Albania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Austria
Algeria b Schneider Electric voie A Lot C22 Tel. : +213 21 92 97 02 à 09

Zone industrielle Rouiba - Alger Fax : +213 21 92 97 00 à 01
Andorra Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France
Angola Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Anguilla Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Antartica Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil
Antigua & Barbuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Argentina b Schneider Argentina Viamonte 2850 - 1678 Caseros Tel.: +54 1 716 88 88 www.schneider-electric.com.ar
(provincia Buenos Aires) Fax: +54 1 716 88 33
Armenia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Aruba Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Australia b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. 2 Solent Circuit Tel.: +61 298 51 28 00 www.schneider.com.au
Limited Norwest Business Park Fax: +61 296 29 83 40
Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2153
Austria b Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H. Birostrasse 11 Tel.: +431 610 540 www.schneider-electric.at
1239 Wien Fax: +431 610 54 54
Azerbaijan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Bahamas b Schneider Electric Union Village Tel. : +1 242 327 42 91 www.squared.com

PO Box 3901 - Nassau Fax : +1 242 327 42 91
Bahrain b Schneider Electric Floor 1 - Juma Building Tel.: +97 322 7897
Abu Horaira Avenue Fax: +97 321 8313
PO Box 355 - 304 Manama
Bangladesh Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Barbados Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Belarus b Schneider Electric Industries SA Prospect Macherova 5, of. 202 Tel. : +375 172 23 75 50
220004 Minsk Fax : +375 172 23 97 61
Belgium b Schneider Electric nv/sa Dieweg 3 Tel.: +3223737711 www.schneider-electric.be

B - 1180 Brussels Fax: +3223753858
Belize Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA
Benin Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Bermuda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Bhutan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Bolivia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Chile
Bosnia and Herzegovina Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Croatia
Botswana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Bouvet island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Brazil b Schneider Electric Brazil Ltda. Avenida Das Nações Unidas 23223 Tel.: +55 55 24 52 33 www.schneider-electric.com.br
Jurubatuba - CEP 04795-907 Fax: +55 55 22 51 34
São Paulo-SP
Brunei (Darussalam) Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore
Bulgaria b Schneider Electric Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov Tel.: +3592 919 42 www.schneiderelectric.bg
1407 Sofiav Fax: +3592 962 44 39
Burkina Faso Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Burundi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Cambodia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Viet Nam
Cameroon b Schneider Electric Cameroon 166, rue de l'Hôtel de Ville Tel.: +237 343 38 84
BP12087 - Douala Fax: +237 343 11 94
Canada b Schneider Canada 19, Waterman Avenue Tel.: +1 416 752 8020 www.schneider-electric.ca
M4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario Fax: +1 416 752 4203
Cape Verde Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Caribee Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Cayman islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Central African Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Chad Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Chile b Schneider Electric Chile S.A. Avda. Pdte Ed. Frei Montalva, 6001-31 Tel.: +56 2 444 3000 www.schneider-electric.co.cl
Conchali - Santiago Fax: +56 2 423 9335
China b Schneider Beijing Landmark bldg-Room 1801 Tel.: +86 10 65 90 69 07 www.schneider-electric.com.cn

8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13
Chaoyang District
100004 Beijing
60
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Christmas island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Cocos (Keeling) islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Colombia b Schneider Electric de Colombia Calle 45A #102-48 Tel.: +57 1 426 97 00
S.A. Bogota DC Fax: +57 1 426 97 40
Comoros Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion
Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Cook islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Costa Rica b Schneider Centroamérica Ltda. 1.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Tel.: +506 232-60-55 www.schneider-ca.com
Americana, Fax: +506 232-04-26
Pavas, San José, Costa Rica C.A.
Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose
Croatia b Schneider Electric SA Fallerovo Setaliste 22 Tel.: +385 1 367 100

HR - 10000 Zagreb Fax: +385 1 367 111
Cuba b Schneider Electric Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Tel.: +53 724 15 59

Calle 36- N°306-Apto1 Fax: +53 724 12 17
Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar
Playa Habana
Cyprus b Schneider Electric Cyprus 28 General Timayia Avenue Tel.: +00357 248 12646
Kyriakos Building, Block #A301 Fax: +00357 246 37382
Larnaca 6046
Czech Republic b Schneider Electric CZ, s.r.o. Thámova 13 Tel.: +420 2 810 88 111 www.schneider-electric.cz
Praha 8 - 186 00 Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49
Democratic Rep. of Congo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Denmark b Schneider Electric A/S Baltorpbakken 14 Tel.: +45 44 73 78 88 www.schneider-electric.dk

DK-2750 Ballerup Fax: +45 44 68 5255
Djibouti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
Dominican Republic b Schneider Electric Calle Jacinto Manon Tel.: +1 809 334 66 63
Esq. Federico Geraldino Fax: +1 809 334 66 68
Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402,
Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo
Ecuador b Schneider Electric Ecuador SA Av.Republica del Salvador 1082 y Nac Tel. : +593 2 224 42 42
Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito Fax : +593 2 224 42 94
Egypt b Schneider Electric Egypt sae 68, El Tayaran Street Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19 www.schneider.com.eg
Nasr City, 11371 - Cairo Fax: +20 24 01 66 87
El Salvador Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric USA
Equatorial Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Eritrea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
Estonia b Lexel Electric Ehitajate tee 110 Tel. : +372 650 97 00

EE 12618 Talinn Fax : +372 650 97 22
Ethiopia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
Falkland islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Brazil
Faroe islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Fiji Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Finland b Schneider Electric Oy Sinimäentie 14 Tel. : +358 9 527 000 www.schneider-electric.fi

02630 Espoo Fax : +358 9 5270 0376
France b Schneider Electric SA 5, rue Nadar Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00 www.schneider-electric.fr

92500 Rueil Malmaison Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20
French Polynesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
French West Indies Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Gabon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Cameroon
Gambia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Georgia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Germany b Schneider Electric GmbH Gothaer Straße 29 Tel.: +49210 240 40 www.schneiderelectric.de
D-40880 Ratingen Fax: +492 10 240 49 256
Ghana b Schneider Electric Ghana PMB Kia Tel. : +233 21 70 11 687

3rd Floor Opeibea House Fax : +233 21 77 96 22
Airport Commercial Center
Liberation road - Accra
Gilbraltar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Spain
Greece b Schneider Electric AE 14th km - RN Athens-Lamia Tel.: +302 106 29 52 00 www.schneider-electric.com.gr

GR - 14564 Kifissia Fax: +302 106 29 52 10
Greenland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Grenada Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Guadeloupe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Martinique
Guam Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
61
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Guatemala Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Guinea-Bissau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Sénégal
Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Guyana Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Haiti Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Heard & Mac Donald isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Honduras Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Hong Kong b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong) Room 3108-28, 31th Floor, Tel.: +852 25 65 06 21
Ltd Sun Hung Kai Centre, Fax: +852 28 11 10 29
30 Harbour Road, Wanchai
Hungary b Schneider Electric Hungária Fehérvári út 108 – 112 Tel.: +36 1 382 26-06 www.schneider-electric.hu
Villamossági Rt. H-1116 Budapest Fax: +36 1 206 1429
Iceland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark
India b Schneider Electric India Max House, 1 Dr Jha Marg, Okhla Tel. : +91 11 631 85 84 www.schneiderelectric-in.com
110 020 New Dehli Tel. : +91 11 631 71 61
Indonesia b P.T. Schneider Indonesia Ventura Building 7th Floor Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06 www.schneider-electric.co.id
Jalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26 Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16
Cilandak - 12430 Jakarta
Iran (Islamic Republic of) b Telemecanique Iran 1047 Avenue VALI ASSR Tel.: +98 218 71 01 42
P.O. Box 15875-3547 Fax: +98 218 71 81 87
15116 Teheran
Irak b Schneider Electric Industries SA 38050 Grenoble Cedex 9 Tel.: +33 04 76 60 54 27

Fax: +33 04 76 60 56 60
Ireland b Schneider Electric Ireland Maynooth Road Tel.: +353+0 1 6012200 www.schneiderelectric.ie
Cellbridge - Co. Kildare Fax: +353+0 1 6012201
Italy b Schneider Electric S.p.A. Centro Direzionale Colleoni Tel.: +39 39 655 8111 www.schneiderelectric.it
Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 Fax: +39 39 605 6237
20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi)
Ivory Coast b Schneider Electric Afrique de Rue Pierre et Marie Curie Tel.: +225 21 75 00 10
l'Ouest 18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18 Fax: +225 21 75 00 30
Jamaica b Schneider Electric Shop#5, Plaza Dunrobin Tel. : +1876 755 41 27

30 Dunrobin Avenue - Kingstown Tel. : +931 87 74
Japan b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd Torigoe F. Bldg Tel.: +81 358 35 35 81 www.schneider-electric.co.jp
1-8-2, Torigoe Fax: +81 358 35 35 85
Taito-Ku - 111-0054 Tokyo
Jordan b Schneider Electric Industr. Jordan Jordan University Street Tel.: 962 65 16 78 87
Abu Al Haj Commercial Complex Fax: 962 65 16 79 1
2nd Floor - Office # 202 - Amman
Kazakstan b Schneider Electric Kazakhstan Prospekt Abaia 157 off 9 Tel. : +7 327 250 93 88
Liaison Office 480009 Almaty Tel. : +7 327 250 63 70
Kenya b Schneider East Africa Power Technics Complex Tel. : +254 2.824.156
Monbasa Road - PO Box 46345 Fax : +254 2.824.157
Nairobi
Kiribati Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Korea b Schneider Electric Korea Ltd 3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-Ka Tel. : +82 2 2630 9700 www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/
Youngdeungpodong, Fax : +82 2 2630 9800
Youngdeungpo-ku
150-037 Seoul
Kurdistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Kuwait b Schneider Electric Kuwait Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd Floor Tel.: +965 240 75 46
PO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat Fax: +965 240 75 06
Kyrgyz Republic Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Laos Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Thailand
Latvia b Lexel Electric 60A A.Deglava str. Tel. : +371 780 23 74/75
LV1035 Riga Fax : +371 754 62 80
Lebanon b Schneider Electric Liban Tabaris, Avenue Charles Malek Tel. : +961 1 20 46 20
Immeuble Ashada, 8 Tel. : +961 1 20 31 19
P.O. Box 166223 - Beyrouth
Lesotho Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Liberia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana
Libya Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia
Liechtenstein Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Switzerland
Lithuania b Lexel Electric 44, Verkiu str. Tel. : +370 278 59 59/61
LT-2012 Vilnius Fax : +370 278 59 60
Loro Sae Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Luxembourg b Schneider Electric Industrie SAS Agence de Metz Tel.: 33 03 87 39 06 03 www.schneider-electric.fr

1, Rue Graham Bell - BP n° 35190 Fax: 33 03 87 74 25 96
57075 Metz cedex 3 - France
62
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Macau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China
Macedonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Bulgaria
Madagascar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric la Reunion
Malawi Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Malaysia b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn No.11 Jalan U1/19, Seksyen U1 Tel. : (603) 7883 6333 www.schneider-
Bhd Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park Fax : (603) 7883 6188 electric.com.my
40150 Shah Alam
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Maldives Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion
Mali Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Malta Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Tunisia
Marshall islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Martinique b Schneider Electric Schneider Electric Tel.: +05 96 51 06 00

Immeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lézarde Fax: +05 96 51 11 26
97232 Le Lamentin
Mauritania Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Mauritius b Schneider Electric Route côtière Tel.: 230 282 18 83

Calodyne - Mauritius Fax: 230 282 18 84
Mayotte Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion
Mexico b Groupe Schneider Mexico Calz. Rojo Gomez N° 1121-A Tel.: +525 686 30 00 www.schneider-
Col. Guadalupe del Moral Fax: +525 686 24 09 electric.com.mx
México, D.F. - C.P. 09300
Micronesia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Moldova Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Romania
Monaco Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric France
Mongolia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Montserrat Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Morocco b Schneider Electric Morocco 26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57 www.schneider.co.ma
Quartier Palmiers Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69
20100 Casablanca
Mozambique Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Myanmar Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Singapore
Namibia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Nauru Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Nepal Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric India
Netherlands b Schneider Electric BV Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 836 Tel.: +31 23 512 4124 www.schneider-electric.nl
2003 RV Haarlem Fax: +31 23 512 4100
Netherlands Antilles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
New Caledonia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
New Zealand b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd 14 Charann Place Avondale Tel. : +64 9 829 04 90 www.schneider-electric.co.nz
P.O. Box 15355 - New Lynn Fax : +64 9 829 04 91
Auckland
Nicaragua Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Niger Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Nigeria b Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza - 8th Floor - Plot 634 Tel. : +234 1 2702973
Abeyemo Alakija Street Fax : +234 1 2702976
Victoria Islan - Lagos
Niue Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Norfolk island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
North Korea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric China
Northern Mariana islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Norway b Schneider Electric Norge A/S Solgaard Skog 2 Tel.: +47 6924 9700 www.schneider-electric.no
Postboks 128 - 1501 Moss Fax: +47 6925 7871
Oman b Schneider Electric CA c/o Arab Development Co Tel.: +968 77 163 64

PO Box 439 - 113 Muscat Fax: +968 77 104 49
Pakistan b Schneider Electric Pakistan 43-L, 2nd floor, M.M. Alam Road, Tel.: +92 42 5754471 à 73
Gulberg II - Lahore Fax: +92 42 5754474
Palau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Panama Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Papua New Guinea Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Paraguay Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Uruguay
63
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Peru b Schneider Electric Peru S.A. Los Telares n°231 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Tel.: +511 348 44 11 www.schneider-electric.com.pe
Lima 03 Fax: +511 348 05 23
Philippines b Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc 5th Floor, ALCO Building Tel. : +632 896 6063
391 Sen, Gil Puyat Avenue Fax : +632 896 7229
Makati 1209
Pitcairn Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Poland b Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. ul. Lubinowa 4a Tel.: +48 22 511 8 200 www.schneider-electric.pl
03-878 - Warszawa Fax: +48 22 511 8 210
Portugal b Schneider Electric Portugal Av.do Forte, 3 Tel.: +351 21 416 5800 www.schneiderelectric.pt
Edificio Suécia II, Piso 3-A Fax: +351 21 416 5857
CP 2028 Carnaxide
2795 Linda-A-Velha
Puerto Rico Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Qatar b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Tel.: +97 4424358
Trad.and Co - P.O. Box 4484 Fax: +97 4424358
Doha
Reunion b Schneider Electric Immeuble Futura, Tel.: +262 28 14 28

190, rue des 2 canons Fax: +262 28 39 37
BP 646 - 97497 Sainte Clothilde
Romania b Schneider Electric Bd Ficusului n°42 Tel.: +401 203 06 50 www.schneider-electric.ro

Apimondia, Corp.A, et.1, Sector 1 Fax: +401 232 15 98
Bucuresti
Russian Federation b Schneider Electric ZAO Enisseyskaya 37 Tel.: +7095 797 40 00 www.schneider-electric.ru
129 281 Moscow Fax: +7095 797 40 03
Rwanda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Samoa Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
San Marino Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy
Sandwich & Georgia island Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Sao Tome & Principe Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Senegal
Saudi Arabia b Schneider Electric Second Industrial City Tel.: +966 1 265 1515
P.O. Box 89249 - 11682 Riyadh Fax: +966 1 265 1860
Senegal b Schneider Electric Sénégal BP 15952 - Dakar-Fann Tel.: +221 820 68 05

Rond point N'Gor - Dakar Fax: +221 820 58 50
Seychelles Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Reunion
Sierra Leone Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ghana
Singapore b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65 Tel.: +65 484 78 77 www.schneider-electric.com.sg
Ltd #02-17/20 TechPoint Fax: +65 484 78 00
Singapore 569059
Slovak Republic b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol Borekova 10 Tel. : +02 45 52 40 10 and 40 30 www.schneider-electric.sk
s.r.o. SK-821 06 Bratislava Fax : +02 45 52 40 00
Slovenia b Schneider Electric, d.o.o. Dunasjka 47 Tel. : +386 1 23 63 555 www.schneider-electric.si

1000 Ljubljana Fax : +386 1 23 63 559
Solomon islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Somalia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
South Africa b Schneider Electric South Africa Private Bag X139 Tel.: +27 11 254 6400 www.schneider-electric.co.za
(PTY) Ltd Halfway House Fax: +27 11 315 8830
1685 - Midrand.
Spain b Schneider Electric España, S.A. Pl. Dr. Letamendi, 5-7 Tel.: +34 93 484 3100 www.schneiderelectric.es
08007 Barcelona Fax: +34 93 484 3308
Sri Lanka b Schneider Electric Industries SA Liaison office SRI Lanka Tel. : +94 77 48 54 89 www.schneiderelectric-in.com
Level 3B Valiant towers
46/7 Nawam Mawatha-Colombo 2
St Helena Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy
St Kitts & Nevis Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
St Lucia Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
St Pierre et Miquelon Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
St Vincent & Grenadines Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Sudan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Egypt
Suriname Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric United States
Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl. Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Denmark
Swaziland Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric South Africa
Sweden b Schneider Electric AB Djupdalsvägen 17/19 Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00 www.schneider-electric.se

19129 Sollentuna Fax: +46 8 623 84 85
Switzerland b Schneider Electric (Switzerland) Schermenwaldstrasse 11 Tel.: +41 31 917 3333 www.schneider-electric.ch
S.A. CH - 3063 Ittigen Fax: +41 31 917 3355
64
Up-dated: 28-07-2003
Syrian Arab Republic b Schneider Electric Syria Elba Street - Malki Tel. : +963 11 37 49 88 00
Gheibeh and Qassas bldg, 1st floor Fax : +963 11 37 17 55 9
PO Box 33876-Damascus
Taiwan, Republic of China b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI., N°37, Ji-Hu Road, Nei-Hu Dist., Tel. : +886 2 8751 6388 www.schneider-electric.com.tw
Taipei 114 Fax : +886 2 8751 6389
Tajikistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Tanzania, United Rep. of Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Thailand b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd 20th Floor Richmond Building Tel.: +662 204 9888 www.schneider-electric.co.th
75 Sukhumvit 26 Road, Klongtoey Fax: +662 204 9816
Bangkok 10110
Togo Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Ivory Coast
Tokelau Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Tonga Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Trinidad & Tobago b Schneider Electric 6, 1st Street West Ext. Tel.: 1868 640 42 04
Beaulieu Avenue Fax: 1868 640 42 04
Trincity Trinidad West Indies
Tunisia b Schneider Electric Tunisia Rue du Lac Oubeira Tel.: +216 71 960 477
1053 Les Berges du Lac - Tunis Fax: +216 71 960 342
Turkey b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi Cad. N°:110 Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 www.schneiderelectric.com.tr
Ticaret A.S. Kat 1-2 - 81080 Göztepe – Istanbul Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75
Turkmenistan b Schneider Electric Turkmenistan rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28, Tel. : +993 12 46 29 52
Liaison Office off.326/327 Fax : +993 12 46 29 52
74 000 Achgabad
Turks & Caicos islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Tuvalu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Uganda Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Kenya
Ukraine b Schneider Electric Rue Krechtchalik 2 Tel.: +380 44 462 04 25 www.schneider-electric.com.ua

252601 Kiev Fax: +380 44 462 04 24
United Arab Emirates b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi PO Box 29580 Tel.: +9712 6 339444
Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Fax: +9712 6 316606
Al Marina Plaza Tower
Abu Dhabi
United Kingdom b Schneider Electric Ltd Braywick House East Tel.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500 www.schneider.co.uk
Windsor Road - Maidenhead Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508
Berkshire SL6 1 DN
United States b Schneider Electric North American Division Tel.: +1 847 397 2600 www.squared.com
1415 Roselle Road Fax: +1 847 925 7500
Palatine - IL 60067
Uruguay b Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A. Ramon Masini 3190 Tel. : +59 82 707 2392
Montevideo Fax : +59 82 707 2184
Uzbekistan Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Russian Fed.
Vanuatu Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Vatican city St./Holy See Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Italy
Venezuela b Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A Calle 162/ Piso 2 Tel.: +58 2 241 13 44 www.schneider-electric.com.ve
Edificio Centro Cynamid Fax: +58 2 243 60 09
La Urbina, 1070 - 75319 Caracas
Viet Nam b R.R.O. of Schneider Electric Unit 2.9, 2nd Floor, e-Town Building Tel.: +84 8 8103 103
Industries S.A.S. in Viet Nam 364 Cong Hoa Street Fax: +84 8 8120 477
Tan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City
Virgin islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.
Wallis & Futuna islands Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Australia
Western Sahara Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric Morocco
Yemen Contacts are assured by Schneider Electric U.A.E.
Yugoslavia b Schneider Electric Jugoslavija Ratarski put 27d Tel.: +381 11 192 414
d.o.o. 11186 Belgrade Fax: +381 11 107 125
Zambia b Schneider Zambia Zambia Office Tel.: +260 222 22 52

c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Fax: +260 222 83 89
Plot 1036 - Accra Road
PO Box 22792 - Kitwe
Zimbabwe b Schneider Electric Zimbabwe Liaison Office Tel.: +263 4 707 179/180
75A Second Street Fax: +263 4 707 176
(corner Livingstone Avenue)
Harare
65
DIA2ED2031002EN
Schneider Electric Industries SAS
Headquarters
Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics
89, bd Franklin Roosevelt given in the text and images in this document are not binding until
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex they have been confirmed with us.
Production : Schneider Electric Industries

Photos : Schneider Electric Industries
http://www.schneider-electric.com Printed by :
ART. 063912 October 2003

Altivar 31H
Installation manual
Contents
Drive references ______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2

Mounting ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4
Wiring ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 8
NOTE: Please also refer to the Programming Manual.
When the drive is powered up, the power components and some of the control
components are connected to the line supply. It is extremely dangerous to touch
them. The drive cover must be kept closed.
In general, the drive power supply must be disconnected before any operation on
either the electrical or mechanical parts of the installation or machine.
After the ALTIVAR has been switched off and the display has disappeared
completely, wait for 10 minutes before working on the equipment. This is the time
required for the capacitors to discharge.
The motor can be stopped during operation by inhibiting start commands or the
speed reference while the drive remains powered up. If personnel safety requires
prevention of sudden restarts, this electronic locking system is not sufficient: fit
a cut-off on the power circuit..
The drive is fitted with safety devices which, in the event of a fault, can shut down
the drive and consequently the motor. The motor itself may be stopped by a
mechanical blockage. Finally, voltage variations, especially line supply failures,
can also cause shutdowns.
If the cause of the shutdown disappears, there is a risk of restarting which may
endanger certain machines or installations, especially those which must
conform to safety regulations.
In this case the user must take precautions against the possibility of restarts, in
particular by using a low speed detector to cut off power to the drive if the motor
performs an unprogrammed shutdown.
The drive must be installed and set up in accordance with both international and
national standards. Bringing the device into conformity is the responsibility of
the systems integrator who must observe the EMC directive among others within
the European Union.
The specifications contained in this document must be applied in order to
comply with the essential requirements of the EMC directive.
The Altivar 31 must be considered as a component: it is neither a machine nor a

device ready for use in accordance with European directives (machinery
directive and electromagnetic compatibility directive). It is the responsibility of
the end user to ensure that the machine meets these standards.
The drive must not be used as a safety device for machines posing a potential
risk of material damage or personal injury (lifting equipment, for example). In
such applications, overspeed checks and checks to ensure that the trajectory
remains under constant control must be made by separate devices which are
independent of the drive.
The products and equipment described in this document may be changed or

modified at any time, either from a technical point of view or in the way they are
operated. Their description can in no way be considered contractual.
1
Drive references
Single phase supply voltage: 200…240 V 50/60 Hz

3-phase motor 200…240 V
Motor Line supply (input) Drive (output) Altivar 31

Power Max. line Max. Apparent Max. inrush Nominal Max. Power Reference
indicated on current (2) prospective power current current In transient dissipated (5)
plate (1) at at line Isc (3) (1) current (1) at nominal
200 V 240 V (4) load
kW/HP A A kA kVA A A A W
0.18/0.25 3.0 2.5 1 0.6 10 1.5 2.3 24 ATV31H018M2
0.37/0.5 5.3 4.4 1 1.0 10 3.3 5.0 41 ATV31H037M2
0.55/0.75 6.8 5.8 1 1.4 10 3.7 5.6 46 ATV31H055M2
0.75/1 8.9 7.5 1 1.8 10 4.8/4.2 (6) 7.2 60 ATV31H075M2
1.1/1.5 12.1 10.2 1 2.4 19 6.9 10.4 74 ATV31HU11M2
1.5/2 15.8 13.3 1 3.2 19 8.0 12.0 90 ATV31HU15M2
2.2/3 21.9 18.4 1 4.4 19 11.0 16.5 123 ATV31HU22M2


200 V 240 V (4) load
0.18/0.25 2.1 1.9 5 0.7 10 1.5 2.3 23 ATV31H018M3X
0.37/0.5 3.8 3.3 5 1.3 10 3.3 5.0 38 ATV31H037M3X
0.55/0.75 4.9 4.2 5 1.7 10 3.7 5.6 43 ATV31H055M3X
0.75/1 6.4 5.6 5 2.2 10 4.8 7.2 55 ATV31H075M3X
1.1/1.5 8.5 7.4 5 3.0 10 6.9 10.4 71 ATV31HU11M3X
1.5/2 11.1 9.6 5 3.8 10 8.0 12.0 86 ATV31HU15M3X
2.2/3 14.9 13.0 5 5.2 10 11.0 16.5 114 ATV31HU22M3X
3/3 19.1 16.6 5 6.6 19 13.7 20.6 146 ATV31HU30M3X
4/5 24.2 21.1 5 8.4 19 17.5 26.3 180 ATV31HU40M3X
5.5/7.5 36.8 32.0 22 12.8 23 27.5 41.3 292 ATV31HU55M3X
7.5/10 46.8 40.9 22 16.2 23 33.0 49.5 388 ATV31HU75M3X
11/15 63.5 55.6 22 22.0 93 54.0 81.0 477 ATV31HD11M3X
15/20 82.1 71.9 22 28.5 93 66.0 99.0 628 ATV31HD15M3X
(1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous
operation.The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.
Above 4 kHz, the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise. The temperature rise is controlled
by a PTC probe in the power module. Nonetheless, the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be
continuous.
Derating curves are shown on page 6 as a function of switching frequency, ambient temperature and mounting conditions.
(2) Current on a line supply with the "Max. prospective line Isc" indicated.
(3) Peak current on power-up, for the max. voltage (240 V + 10%).
(4) For 60 seconds.
(5) Reference for a drive with built-in terminal but no control unit. For a drive with control potentiometer and RUN/STOP buttons, add an A
at the end of the reference, e.g.: ATV31H018M2A.
(6) 4.8 A at 200 V/4.6 A at 208 V/4.2 A at 230 V and 240 V.
2
Drive references


380 V 500 V (4) load
0.37/0.5 2.2 1.7 5 1.5 10 1.5 2.3 32 ATV31H037N4
0.55/0.75 2.8 2.2 5 1.8 10 1.9 2.9 37 ATV31H055N4
0.75/1 3.6 2.7 5 2.4 10 2.3 3.5 41 ATV31H075N4
1.1/1.5 4.9 3.7 5 3.2 10 3.0 4.5 48 ATV31HU11N4
1.5/2 6.4 4.8 5 4.2 10 4.1 6.2 61 ATV31HU15N4
2.2/3 8.9 6.7 5 5.9 10 5.5 8.3 79 ATV31HU22N4
3/3 10.9 8.3 5 7.1 10 7.1 10.7 125 ATV31HU30N4
4/5 13.9 10.6 5 9.2 10 9.5 14.3 150 ATV31HU40N4
5.5/7.5 21.9 16.5 22 15.0 30 14.3 21.5 232 ATV31HU55N4
7.5/10 27.7 21.0 22 18.0 30 17.0 25.5 269 ATV31HU75N4
11/15 37.2 28.4 22 25.0 97 27.7 41.6 397 ATV31HD11N4
15/20 48.2 36.8 22 32.0 97 33.0 49.5 492 ATV31HD15N4


indicated on current (2) prospective power current current In transient dissipated
plate (1) at at line Isc (3) (1) current (1) at
525 V 600 V (4) nominal
load
0.75/1 2.8 2.4 5 2.5 12 1.7 2.6 36 ATV31H075S6X
1.5/2 4.8 4.2 5 4.4 12 2.7 4.1 48 ATV31HU15S6X
2.2/3 6.4 5.6 5 5.8 12 3.9 5.9 62 ATV31HU22S6X
4/5 10.7 9.3 5 9.7 12 6.1 9.2 94 ATV31HU40S6X
5.5/7.5 16.2 14.1 22 15.0 36 9.0 13.5 133 ATV31HU55S6X
7.5/10 21.3 18.5 22 19.0 36 11.0 16.5 165 ATV31HU75S6X
11/15 27.8 24.4 22 25.0 117 17.0 25.5 257 ATV31HD11S6X
15/20 36.4 31.8 22 33.0 117 22.0 33.0 335 ATV31HD15S6X
(1) These power ratings and currents are for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C and a switching frequency of 4 kHz in continuous
operation. The switching frequency is adjustable from 2 to 16 kHz.
Above 4 kHz, the drive will reduce the switching frequency in the event of excessive temperature rise. The temperature rise is controlled
by a PTC probe in the power module. Nonetheless, the nominal drive current should be derated if operation above 4 kHz needs to be
continuous.
Derating curves are shown on page 6 as a function of switching frequency, ambient temperature and mounting conditions.
(2) Current on a line supply with the "Max. prospective line Isc" indicated.
(3) Peak current on power-up, for the max. voltage (500 V + 10%, 600 V + 10%).
(4) For 60 seconds.
(5) Reference for a drive with built-in terminal but no control unit. For a drive with control potentiometer and RUN/STOP buttons, add an A
at the end of the reference, e.g.: ATV31H037N4A.
3
Mounting
Dimensions and weights

2Ø
h
H
b
c = G =
a
ATV31 a b c (1) G hr H Ø For Weight

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm screw kg
H018M3X, H037M3X Size 1 72 145 120 60±1 5 121.5±1 2x5 M4 0.9
H055M3X, H075M3X Size 2 72 145 130 60±1 5 121.5±1 2x5 M4 0.9
H018M2, H037M2 Size 3 72 145 130 60±1 5 121.5±1 2x5 M4 1.05
H055M2, H075M2 Size 4 72 145 140 60±1 5 121.5±1 2x5 M4 1.05
HU11M3X, HU15M3X Size 5 105 143 130 93±1 5 121.5±1 2x5 M4 1.25
HU11M2, HU15M2, Size 6 105 143 150 93±1 5 121.5±1 2x5 M4 1.35
HU22M3X,
H037N4, H055N4, H075N4,
HU11N4,HU15N4,
H075S6X, HU15S6X
4Ø
h
b
c = G =
a
ATV31 a b c (1) G hr H Ø For Weight

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm screw kg
HU22M2, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, Size 7 140 184 150 126±1 6.5 157±1 4x5 M4 2.35
HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4,
HU22S6X, HU40S6X
HU55M3X, HU75M3X, Size 8 180 232 170 160±1 5 210±1 4x5 M4 4.70
HU55N4, HU75N4,
HU55S6X, HU75S6X
HD11M3X, HD15M3X, Size 9 245 330 190 225±1 7 295±1 4x6 M5 9.0
HD11N4, HD15N4,
HD11S6X, HD15S6X
(1) For drives in the A range, add 8 mm for the protruding potentiometer button.
4
Mounting
Mounting and temperature conditions

≥ 50 mm
Do not place it close to heating elements.

Leave sufficient free space to ensure that the air required for cooling purposes can circulate from the bottom to the
top of the unit.
Free space in front of unit: 10 mm minimum.
When IP20 protection is adequate, we recommend that the protective cover on the top of the drive be removed,
as shown below.
≥ 50 mm
Removing the protective cover
Example ATV31HU11M3X
3 types of mounting are possible:

Type A Free space u 50 mm on each side, with protective cover fitted
mounting:
u 50 mm u 50 mm
Type B Drives mounted side-by-side, protective cover removed (the degree of protection becomes IP20)
mounting:
Type C Free space u 50 mm on each side, protective cover removed (the degree of protection becomes IP20)
mounting:
u 50 mm u 50 mm
5
Mounting
Derating curves for the drive current In as a function of the temperature, switching frequency and type of mounting.
I/In
In = 100 %
-5%
90 % - 10 % - 10 %
- 15 %
80 % - 20 %
40°C mounting types A, B and C
- 25 % - 25 %
70 % - 30 %
50°C mounting type C
- 35 %
- 35 %
60 % - 40 %
50°C mounting types A and B
- 45 %
50 % - 50 %
60°C mounting type C
- 55 %
40 %
60°C mounting types A and B
- 65 %
30 %
Switching frequency
4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz
For intermediate temperatures (e.g. 55°C), interpolate between 2 curves.
If you are installing the drives in enclosures, make provision for a flow of air at least equal to the
value given in the table below for each drive.
ATV31 Flow rate in m3/hour

H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, 18
H018M3X, H037M3X, H055M3X,
H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4
H075S6X, HU15S6X
H075M2, HU11M2, HU15M2 33
H075M3X, HU11M3X, HU15M3X
HU15N4, HU22N4
HU22S6X, HU40S6X
HU22M2, 93
HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X
HU30N4, HU40N4
HU55S6X, HU75S6X
HU55M3X 102
HU55N4, HU75N4
HD11S6X
HU75M3X, HD11M3X, 168
HD11N4, HD15N4
HD15S6X
HD15M3X 216
6
Mounting
EMC mounting plate: Supplied with the drive
Fix the EMC equipotentiality mounting plate to the holes in the ATV 31 heatsink using the 2 screws supplied, as shown in the drawings
below.
Size 1 - 4 Size 5 -6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9
2 2
50
49
48 2
75
2
75
Screws supplied:
4 x M4 screws for fixing the EMC clamps (clamps not supplied)
1 x M5 screw for ground
ATV31 ATV31
H018M3X, H037M3X Size 1 HU22M2, HU30M3X, HU40M3X, Size 7
H055M3X, H075M3X Size 2 HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4,
HU22S6X, HU40S6X
H018M2, H037M2 Size 3 HU55M3X, HU75M3X, Size 8
H055M2, H075M2 Size 4 HU55N4, HU75N4,
HU55S6X, HU75S6X
HU11M3X, HU15M3X Size 5 HD11M3X, HD15M3X, Size 9
HU11M2, HU15M2, HU22M3X, Size 6 HD11N4, HD15N4,
H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4, HU15N4, HD11S6X, HD15S6X
H075S6X, HU15S6X
7
Wiring
Access to terminals
To access the terminals, open the cover as shown in the example below.
Example ATV31HU11M2
Power terminals
Connect the power terminals before connecting the control terminals.
Power terminal characteristics

Altivar ATV 31 Maximum connection capacity Tightening torque
AWG mm2 in Nm
H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, H075M2, AWG 14 2.5 0.8
H018M3X, H037M3X, H055M3X, H075M3X, HU11M3X, HU15M3X
HU11M2, HU15M2, HU22M2, AWG 10 5 1.2
HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X,
H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4,HU15N4, HU22N4, HU30N4, HU40N4
H075S6X, HU15S6X, HU22S6X, HU40S6X
HU55M3X, HU75M3X, AWG 6 16 2.2
HU55N4, HU75N4,
HU55S6X, HU75S6X
HD11M3X, HD15M3X, AWG 3 25 4
HD11N4, HD15N4,
HD11S6X, HD15S6X
Power terminal functions

Terminal Function For Altivar ATV 31
t Ground terminal All ratings
R/L1 Power supply ATV31ppppM2
S/L2
R/L1 ATV31ppppM3X
S/L2 ATV31ppppN4
T/L3 ATV31ppppS6X
PO DC bus + polarity All ratings
PA/+ Output to braking resistor (+ polarity) All ratings
PB Output to braking resistor All ratings
PC/- DC bus - polarity All ratings
U/T1 Outputs to the motor All ratings
V/T2
W/T3
Never remove the commoning link between PO and PA/+.
8
Wiring
Arrangement of the power terminals
ATV 31H018M3X, H037M3X, H055M3X, H075M3X ATV 31H018M2, H037M2, H055M2, H075M2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 R/L1 S/L2
P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
ATV 31HU11M3X, HU15M3X, HU22M3X, HU30M3X, HU40M3X,

H037N4, H055N4, H075N4, HU11N4, HU15N4, HU22N4,
HU30N4, HU40N4, H075S6X, HU15S6X, HU22S6X,
HU40S6X ATV 31HU11M2, HU15M2, HU22M2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2
P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
ATV 31HU55M3X, HU75M3X, HU55N4, HU75N4, HU55S6X, HU75S6X
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
ATV 31HD11M3X, HD15M3X, HD11N4, HD15N4, HD11S6X, HD15S6X
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P0 PA/+ PB PC/- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
9
Wiring
Control terminals
COM
AOC
AOV
R1C
R2C
R1A
R1B
R2A
Logic input Source
AI3
configuration CLI
switch
SINK
COM
10V
CLI
AI1
AI2
LI4
LI5
LI6
Control
terminals
24V
LI1
LI2
LI3
RJ45
connector RJ45
- Maximum connection capacity: 2.5 mm2 - AWG 14

- Max. tightening torque: 0.6 Nm
10
Wiring
Control terminals
Arrangement, characteristics and functions of the control terminals
Terminal Function Electrical characteristics
R1A Common point C/O contact (R1C) of • Min. switching capacity: 10 mA for 5 V c
R1B programmable relay R1 • Max. switching capacity on resistive load (cos ϕ = 1 and L/R = 0 ms):
R1C 5 A for 250 V a and 30 V c
R2A N/O contact of programmable relay R2 • Max. switching capacity on inductive load (cos ϕ = 0.4 and L/R = 7 ms):
R2C 1.5 A for 250 V a and 30 V c
• Sampling time 8 ms
• Service life: 100,000 operations at max. switching power
1,000,000 operations at min. switching power
COM Analog I/O common 0V

AI1 Analog voltage input Analog input 0 + 10 V (max. safe voltage 30 V)
• Impedance 30 kΩ
• Resolution 0.01 V, 10-bit converter
• Precision ± 4.3%, linearity ± 0.2%, of max. value
• Operation with shielded cable 100 m max.
10 V Power supply for setpoint +10 V (+ 8% - 0), 10 mA max, protected against short-circuits and overloads
potentiometer
1 to 10 kΩ
AI2 Analog voltage input Bipolar analog input 0 ± 10 V (max. safe voltage ± 30 V)
The + or - polarity of the voltage on AI2 affects the direction of the setpoint and
therefore the direction of operation.
• Impedance 30 kΩ
• Resolution 0.01 V, 10-bit + sign converter
• Operation with shielded cable 100 m max.
AI3 Analog current input Analog input X - Y mA. X and Y can be programmed from 0 to 20 mA
• Impedance 250 Ω
• Resolution 0.02 mA, 10-bit converter
COM Analog I/O common 0V
AOV Analog voltage output AOV Analog output 0 to 10 V, min. load impedance 470 Ω
or or
AOC Analog current output AOC Analog output X - Y mA. X and Y can be programmed from 0 to 20 mA,
or max. load impedance 800 Ω
Logic voltage output AOC • Resolution 8 bits (1)
AOV or AOC can be assigned • Precision ± 1% (1)
(either, but not both) • Linearity ± 0.2% (1)
This analog output can be configured as a 24 V logic output on AOC, min. load
impedance 1.2 kΩ.
(1) Characteristics of digital/analog converter.
24 V Logic input power supply + 24 V protected against short-circuits and overloads, min. 19 V, max. 30 V
Max. customer current available 100 mA
LI1 Logic inputs Programmable logic inputs
LI2 • + 24 V power supply (max. 30 V)
LI3 • Impedance 3.5 kΩ
• State 0 if < 5 V, state 1 if > 11 V (voltage difference between LI- and CLI)
LI4 Logic inputs Programmable logic inputs

LI5 • + 24 V power supply (max. 30 V)
LI6 • Impedance 3.5 kΩ
• State 0 if < 5 V, state 1 if > 11 V (voltage difference between LI- and CLI)
CLI Logic input common See page 12.
11
Wiring
Wiring diagram for factory settings
ATV31ppppM2
Single-phase supply
(1)
R / L1
S / L2
ATV31ppppM3X/N4/S6X
3-phase supply
Using the analog output as a
(1) logic output
(2)
U / T1 R / L1
S / L2
W / T3 T / L3
R1A
R1C
R1B
R2A
R2C
CLI
LI1
LI2
LI3
LI4
LI5
LI6
24V
PA / +
V / T2
PC / -
COM
COM
AOC
AOV
A0C
+10
AI1
AI3
AI2
PB
P0
24 V relay
W1
U1
V1
X - Y mA or
M Reference
3= potentiometer 24 V PLC input
Braking resistor,
0 ± 10 V or
if used LED
(1) Line choke, if used (single phase or 3-phase)

(2) Fault relay contacts, for remote indication of the drive status.
Note: Fit interference suppressors to all inductive circuits near the drive or coupled to the same circuit (relays, contactors, solenoid valves,
etc).
Choice of associated components:

Please refer to the catalogue.
Logic input switch

This switch assigns the logic input common link to 0V, 24 V or "floating":
0V
SOURCE CLI at 0 V (factory setting)
CLI LI1 LIx
CLI CLI "floating"
CLI LI1 LIx
24V
CLI at 24 V
SINK
CLI LI1 LIx
12
Wiring
Examples of recommended circuit diagrams

Using volt-free contacts
• Switch in "Source" position • Switch in "SINK" position
(ATV31 factory setting for types other than ATV31ppppA) (factory setting for ATV31ppppA)
0V 24V
LI1 24V LI1 COM
Using PLC transistor outputs

• Switch in CLI position • Switch in CLI position
COM CLI LI1 COM CLI LI1
24V
0V 0V 24V
PLC PLC
Wiring recommendations
Power
The drive must be earthed to conform with the regulations concerning high leakage currents (over 3.5 mA).
When upstream protection by means of a "residual current device" is required by the installation standards, a type A device should be used
for single-phase drives and type B for 3-phase drives. Choose a suitable model incorporating:
• HF current filtering
• A time delay which prevents tripping caused by the load from stray capacitance on power-up. The time delay is not possible for 30 mA
devices. In this case, choose devices with immunity against accidental tripping, for example RCDs with reinforced immunity from the s.i
range (Merlin Gerin brand).
If the installation includes several drives, provide one "residual current device" per drive.
Keep the power cables separate from circuits in the installation with low-level signals (detectors, PLCs, measuring apparatus, video,
telephone).
If you are using cables > 50 m between the drive and the motor, add output filters (please refer to the catalogue).
Control
Keep the control circuits away from the power cables. For control and speed reference circuits, we recommend using shielded twisted
cables with a pitch of between 25 and 50 mm, connecting the shielding to ground at each end.
13
Wiring
Operation on an IT system
IT system: Isolated or impedance earthed neutral.
Use a permanent insulation monitor compatible with non-linear loads (a Merlin Gerin type XM200, for example).
ATV 31pppM2 and N4 drives feature built-in RFI filters. These filters can be isolated from ground for operation on an IT system as follows:
ATV31H018M2 to U22M2 and ATV31H037N4 to U40N4:
Pull out the jumper on the left of the ground terminal as illustrated below.
Normal
(filter connected)
IT system
(filter
disconnected)
ATV31HU55N4 to D15N4:
Move the cable tag on the top left of the power terminals as illustrated below (example ATV31HU55N4):
IT system
(filter disconnected)
Normal
(filter connected)
(factory setting)
14
Wiring
Principle
• Grounds between the drive, motor and cable shielding must have "high frequency" equipotentiality.
• Use shielded cables with shielding connected to ground throughout 360° at both ends for the motor cable 6, braking resistor (if used) 8,
and control-signalling cables 7. Metal ducting or conduit can be used for part of the shielding length provided that there is no break in
continuity.
• Ensure maximum separation between the power supply cable (line supply) and the motor cable.
Installation diagram (examples)

Sizes 1 to 7 Size 8 Size 9
2
2
2
4
3 3 5
3
5 1
1
1
4 8 8 4
8 5
6 6
6 7 7
7
Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 Size 9

ATV31 H018M3X, H055M3X, H018M2, H055M2, HU11M3X, HU11M2, HU15M2 HU22M2 HU55M3X, HD11M3X,
H037M3X H075M3X H037M2 H075M2 HU15M3X HU22M3X HU30M3X, HU40M3X HU75M3X HD15M3X
H037N4, H055N4, HU22N4, HU30N4, HU55N4, HD11N4,
H075N4, HU11N4, HU40N4 HU75N4 HD15N4
HU15N4 HU22S6X, HU40S6X HU55S6X, HD11S6X,
H075S6X, HU15S6X HU75S6X HD15S6X
1 Sheet steel grounded plate supplied with the drive, to be fitted as indicated on the diagram.
2 Altivar 31
3 Non-shielded power supply wires or cable
4 Non-shielded wires for relay contacts
5 Fix and ground the shielding of cables 6, 7 and 8 as close as possible to the drive:
- Strip the shielding.
- Use stainless steel cable clamps of an appropriate size on the parts from which the shielding has been stripped, to attach them to the
plate 1.
The shielding must be clamped tightly enough to the metal plate to ensure correct contact.
6 Shielded cable for motor connection with shielding connected to ground at both ends.
The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes.
For 0.18 to 1.5 kW drives, if the switching frequency is higher than 12 kHz, use cables with low linear capacitance: max. 130 pF
(picoFarads) per metre.
7 Shielded cable for connecting the control/signalling wiring.

For applications requiring several conductors, use cables with a small cross-section (0.5 mm2).
The shielding must be connected to ground at both ends. The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC
shielded metal boxes.
8 Shielded cable for connecting braking resistor (if fitted).

The shielding must be continuous and intermediate terminals must be in EMC shielded metal boxes.
Note:
• If using an additional input filter, it should be mounted under the drive and connected directly to the line supply via an unshielded cable.
Link 3 on the drive is then via the filter output cable.
• The HF equipotential ground connection between the drive, motor and cable shielding does not remove the need to connect the PE
protective conductors (green-yellow) to the appropriate terminals on each unit.
15
VVDED303041EN atv31h_installing manual_EN_V2
2004-02
Altivar 31
User's manual
Communication variables
####
####
####
Contents
General _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 3
Communication bus monitoring __________________________________________________________________________________ 5
Supervision and control in LINE mode _____________________________________________________________________________ 6
Function compatibility _________________________________________________________________________________________ 10
DRIVECOM variables _________________________________________________________________________________________ 11
Control variables_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 14
Monitoring variables __________________________________________________________________________________________ 16
Identification variables ________________________________________________________________________________________ 22
Configuration and adjustment variables ___________________________________________________________________________ 23
Replacing an ATV28 with an ATV31 _____________________________________________________________________________ 51
Code index _________________________________________________________________________________________________ 52
NOTE
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, Schneider Electric SA assumes no liability
for any omissions or errors it may contain, nor for any damages resulting from the application or use of the information
herein.
The products described in this document may be changed or modified at any time, either from a technical point of view
or in the way they are operated. Their description can in no way be considered contractual.
2
General
The Altivar 31 can be connected directly to Modbus and CANopen buses by means of an RJ45 connector, which supports both protocols.
The "Communication variables" User's Manual defines the drive control processes and the drive variables which can be accessed by these
buses.
It supplements each of the following manuals:
• Modbus
• CANopen
These documents should be referred to for the hardware and software setup specific to each bus.
We also recommend consulting the Programming Manual for additional explanations (operation, factory settings, etc).
If the PowerSuite software workshop is used, consult the on-line help provided.
The communication variables are listed with:

• Their address •••• in decimal format for Modbus
• Their index and subindex address ••••/•• in hexadecimal format for CANopen
They are grouped into several different tables according to the following criteria:
• DRIVECOM variables
• control variables
• monitoring variables
• identification variables
• configuration and adjustment variables
Read/write
Whether the parameters have read and/or write access is indicated in the "Read/Write" column with the following codes:
• R: read only, drive stopped or running
• R/WS: read access when drive stopped or running and write access only when drive stopped
• R/W: read and write access when drive stopped or running
Authorized addresses
Only the addresses and values defined in this document can be used. Any other address or value must be considered to be
reserved and must never be written. Failure to observe this precaution may result in malfunctions.
3
Control modes
Control and reference channels

The control and the reference may originate from different channels:
- the terminal block
- the built-in keypad (ATV31...A only)
- the remote display terminal
- Modbus
- CANopen
These channels are managed:

- either in priority mode for compatibility with the ATV28
- or in deterministic mode
The "Function access level (LAC)" and "Mixed mode (CHCF)" parameters are used to select the run mode.
Operation is described in detail in the Programming Manual ("Control menu" section).
Priority stops
In line mode, stop requests which can be activated by the terminals or by the remote display terminal always have priority:
Type of stop From Drivecom state Actions for restoring control of the Altivar using the fieldbus
reached
Fast stop LI2 to LI6 "Operation enabled" - Set the logic input assigned to the "fast stop" function to 1 (active
at 0)
DC injection stop LI2 to LI6 "Operation enabled" - Set the logic input assigned to the "injection stop" function to 0
(active at 1)
Freewheel stop LI2 to LI6 "Switch on disabled" - Set the logic input assigned to the "freewheel stop" function to 1
(active at 0)
- Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status
3-wire control stop via LI1 "Switch on disabled" - Set the logic input assigned to STOP to 1 (active at 0)
STOP logic input (LI1) (3-wire control) - Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status
Stop by the display terminal STOP key "Switch on disabled" - Release the Stop key
(1) - Perform the transitions required to return the drive to "run" status
(1)Unless the PSt parameter has been set to "NO"
4
Communication bus monitoring
The drive behaviour in the event of loss of communication can be configured via the "SLL" parameter (page 47) for Modbus or the "COL"
parameter (page 47) for CANopen. This configuration is saved if the power supply is disconnected.
In its factory setting, loss of communication triggers a fault (COF for CANopen or SLF for Modbus) with freewheel stopping.
Bit 14 (NTO) of "Extended control word (CMI)" is also used to inhibit Modbus communication monitoring. This configuration is not
saved if the power supply is disconnected.
For safety reasons, inhibiting the communication fault should be restricted to the debug phase or to special applications.
5
Supervision and control in LINE mode
DRIVECOM status chart
Key Enter the status

chart All states
DRIVECOM drive status
Drive status applied to ATV 0 13 Fault
ETA = 16#xxxx
Not ready to switch on Malfunction
"ATV terminal display"
ATV powered down reaction active
Transition
condition X ETA = 16#xx00 ETA = 16#xxxx
CMD = 16#xxxx Fault disappeared, 14
1 fault reset
CMD =16#0080 Malfunction
Switch on disabled ATV faulty
ATV locked 15
ETA = 16#xxx8
Disable voltage ETA = 16#xx40
CMD = 16#0000 "nSt" Disable voltage
or CMD = 16#0000
Disable
modification of or
voltage
9 a configuration Shutdown CMD = 16#0000 modification of
parameter CMD = 16#0006 2 7
or a configuration
(motor stopped) 12 parameter
Quick stop
or (motor stopped)
CMD = 16#0002
STOP key on or
display terminal STOP key on
Disable
or display terminal
Ready to switch on voltage
STOP at terminals 10CMD = 16#0000 or
ATV waiting
or STOP at terminals
ETA = 16#xx21
modification of
"nSt" a configuration
8
Shutdown Switch on Shutdown parameter
CMD =16#0006 CMD = 16#0007 3 6
CMD = 16#0006 (motor stopped)
Switched on
ATV ready
3A
ETA = 16#xx23 Quick stop active
Enable Emergency stop
operation "nSt"
CMD = 16#xxxF ETA = 16#xx07
Enable Disable
operation 4 "rdY, dCb"
5 operation
CMD = 16#xxxF CMD = 16#0007
Operation enabled Quick stop
ATV running CMD = 16#000B
11
ETA = 16#xx27
"rUn, rdY, ..."
Examples: Examples (default configuration):

ETA = 16#0627 : Normal stop or CMD = 16#000F : Forward operation
Forward operation, speed reached CMD = 16#080F : Reverse operation
ETA = 16#8627 : Reverse operation, speed reached CMD = 16#100F : Stop (configured by "Stt")
ETA = 16#0227 : Forward operation, ACC or DEC CMD = 16#200F : DC injection stop
ETA = 16#8227 : Reverse operation, ACC or DEC CMD = 16#400F : Fast stop
Any "Operation enabled" output except "Quick stop" = freewheel stop
6
The Altivar control process using the communication bus conforms to the CANopen DS402 profile status chart compatible with the
DRIVECOM standard. Each state represents an aspect of the internal behaviour of the drive.
This chart evolves according to whether the control word is sent (CMD W8501) or an event occurs (example: lock following malfunction).
The drive status can be identified by the value of the status word (ETA W3201).
Not ready to switch on (Initialization):

Communication is being initialized.
Transient state invisible to the communication bus.
Switch on disabled (Configuration):

Initialization of the drive is complete.
The configuration and adjustment parameters can be modified.
If all or part of the configuration and settings are to be loaded, we recommend disabling the consistency check function during the transfer
(CMI W8504, bit 15 = 1). On completion of the transfer, the consistency check must be enabled (CMI W8504, bit 15 = 0).
The drive is locked.
Ready to switch on and Switched on (Drive initialized):

The configuration and adjustment parameters can be modified. In the "Switched on" state, modifying a configuration parameter returns the
drive to the "Switch on disabled" state.
The power stage of the drive is ready to operate, but voltage has not yet been applied to the output.
Operation enabled (Operational):

Only the adjustment parameters can be modified. Modifying a configuration parameter (motor stopped) returns the drive to the "Switch on
disabled" state.
The drive functions are activated and voltage is applied to the motor terminals.
Auto-tuning (tUn) requires an injection of current. The drive must therefore be in this state for this command.
Quick stop active (Emergency stop active):

Fast stop.
Restarting is only possible after the drive has changed to the "Switch on disabled" state.
Malfunction reaction active (Reaction on fault):

Transient state during which the drive performs an action appropriate to the type of fault.
The drive function is disabled.
Malfunction (Fault):
The drive is faulty.
7
CMD control word (W8501)
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

Enable Quick stop Disable voltage
Fault reset 0 0 0 Switch on
operation (active at 0) (active at 0)

(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 0 0 0
(1)This bit action depends on the LAC "Access levels" parameter and the functions configured by the user.
For example, to use bit 15 to switch the ramp, simply configure LAC = L3 (Access to advanced functions and management of mixed
modes) and set the "Ramp switching rPS" configuration parameter to Cd15.
bit 7 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

Transition Typical value of CMD
Command Final state Enable Disable Switch
address Reset Quick stop (W8501)
operation voltage on
Ready to
Shut down 2, 6, 8 x x 1 1 0 16#0006
switch on
Switch on 3 Switched on x x 1 1 1 16#0007
Enable Operation
4 x 1 1 1 1 16#000F
operation enabled
Disable
5 Switched on x 0 1 1 1 16#0007
operation
Switch on
Disable voltage 7, 9, 10, 12 x x x 0 x 16#0000
disabled
Quick stop
11 16#000B
active
Quick stop x x 0 1 x or
Switch on 16#0002
7, 10
disabled
Switch on
Fault reset 15 0V1 x x x x 16#0080
disabled
x: State not significant

0 V 1: Change from 0 to 1
8
ETA status word (W3201)

Switch on Quick stop 0 Operation Ready to switch
Alarm Malfunction Switched on
disabled active at 0 (1) enabled on

Forced local
Direction of Stop via STOP Reference Reference
0 0 mode 0
rotation key exceeded reached
(active at 0)
bit 6 bit 5 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 ETA (W3201)

State Switch on Operation Ready to masked by
Quick stop Malfunction Switched on 16#006F
disabled enabled switch on
16#0000
Not ready to switch on 0 x 0 0 0 0
16#0020
16#0040
Switch on disabled 1 x 0 0 0 0
16#0060
Ready to switch on 0 1 0 0 0 1 16#0021
Switched on 0 1 0 0 1 1 16#0023
Operation enabled 0 1 0 1 1 1 16#0027
16#0008
Malfunction 0 x 1 0 0 0
16#0028
Malfunction reaction 16#000F
0 x 1 1 1 1
active 16#002F
Quick stop active 0 0 0 1 1 1 16#0007
x: State not significant
(1)Bit 4 of the ETA status word corresponds to DRIVECOM’s "Voltage disabled".
9
Function compatibility
Incompatible functions
The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below:
Automatic restart
This is only possible for 2-wire level detection control (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO).
Flying restart
This function is locked if automatic injection on stopping is configured as DC (AdC = Ct).
Reverse
On the ATV31pppA range only, this function is locked if local control is active (tCC = LOC).

The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one
another. Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible.
If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured.
To configure a function, first check that the incompatible functions are not assigned, especially "Preset speeds" and "Summing inputs" which
are assigned by default in the factory setting.
Management of limit switches
DC injection stop
Brake sequence
Summing inputs
Freewheel stop
Preset speeds
Jog operation
+/- speed (1)
PI regulator
Fast stop
Summing inputs p A p A
+/- speed (1) p p p p
Management of limit switches p
Preset speeds X p p A
PI regulator p p p p p p
Jog operation X p X p p
Brake sequence p p p
DC injection stop p A
Fast stop A
Freewheel stop X X
(1)Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2.
p Incompatible functions Compatible functions N/A
Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time):

The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the
X A other.

Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.
Logic and analog input application functions

Each of the functions can be assigned to one of the inputs.
A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp for example). The user must therefore ensure that
these functions can be used at the same time.
10
DRIVECOM variables
Modbus CANopen Read/

Code Name/Description/Possible values
address address Write
8601 6040 CMDD R/W DRIVECOM control word
Identical to CMD (page 14).
bit 0: "Switch on": active at 1
bit 1: "Disable Voltage": active at 0
bit 2: "Quick Stop": active at 0
bit 3: "Enable Operation": active at 1
bits 4 to 6: Reserved: set to 0
bit 7: Fault reset: active on rising edge 0 -> 1
For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L1 or L2:
bit 11 = 0: Forward direction command

bit 11 = 1: Reverse direction command
bit 12 = 0: No action
bit 12 = 1: Stop command depending on the Stt "Stop type" parameter
bit13 = 1: Injection stop command
bit14 = 1: Fast stop command
bit 15: Reserved: set to 0
For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L3:
Factory assignments
bit 13: No action
bit 14: No action
bit 15: No action
These 5 bits can be assigned to functions.

For example, to use bit 15 to switch the ramp, simply set the "Ramp switching" rPS
configuration parameter (page 33) to Cd15.
8602 6042 LFRD R/W Speed reference via the bus (signed value)
DSP402: vl target velocity
DRIVECOM: Nominal speed value
Unit:
• 1 = 1 rpm if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0
• 1 ≈ 0.018 Hz (resolution 32767 points = 600 Hz) if bit 9 of CMI = 1
8603 6041 ETAD R DRIVECOM status word
Identical to ETA (page 16).
bit 0: Ready to switch on
bit 1: Switched on
bit 2: Operation enabled
bit 3 = 0: No fault
bit 3 = 1: Malfunction, fault present (FAI)
bit 4: Voltage disabled
bit 5: Quick stop
bit 6: Switch on disabled
bit 7 = 0: No alarm
bit 7 = 1: Alarm present
bit 8: Reserved
bit 9 = 0: Forced local mode in progress (FLO)
bit 9 = 1: No forced local mode
bit 10 = 0: Reference not reached (transient state)
bit 10 = 1: Reference reached (steady state)
bit 11 = 0: LFRD reference normal
bit 11 = 1: LFRD reference exceeded (< LSP or > HSP) Caution: LFRD is expressed in rpm,
LSP and HSP in Hz
bits 12 and 13: Reserved
bit 14 = 0: No stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote
display terminal
bit 14 = 1: Stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote display
terminal
bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation (output frequency)
bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency)
11
DRIVECOM variables

8605 6043 FRHD R Speed reference (signed ramp input)
DSP402: vl velocity demand
DRIVECOM: Reference speed variable
Unit: 1 rpm
8604 6044 RFRD R Output speed (signed value)
DSP402: vl control effort
DRIVECOM: Actual speed value
Unit:
• 1 = 1 rpm if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0
8606 603F ERRD R Fault code
DSP402: Error code
DRIVECOM: Malfunction code
0000H = "nOF": No fault saved

1000H = "CrF": Capacitor pre-charge fault or
= "OLF": Motor overload fault or
= "SOF": Motor overspeed fault
2310H = "OCF": Overcurrent fault
2320H = "SCF": Impeding short-circuit fault or
= "SCF": Power module fault, specific to ATV31pD15p
2330H = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (to earth)
2340H = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (phase to phase)
3110H = "OSF": Line supply overvoltage fault
3120H = "USF": Line supply undervoltage fault
3130H = "PHF": Line supply phase loss fault
3310H = "ObF": DC bus overvoltage fault or
= "OPF": Motor phase loss fault or
= "OPF": Motor phase loss fault - 3 phases
4210H = "OHF": Drive overheating fault
5520H = "EEF": EEPROM memory fault
6100H = "InF": Internal fault
6300H = "CFF": Configuration (parameters) incorrect or
= "CFI": Configuration (parameters) invalid
7300H = "LFF": 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3
7510H = "SLF": Modbus communication fault
8100H = "COF": CANopen communication fault
9000H = "EPF": External fault
FF00H = "tnF": Auto-tuning fault
FF01H = "bLF": Brake control fault
8607 - 6046 / 1 SMIL R/W Min. speed
8608 DSP402: vl velocity min amount
DRIVECOM: Speed min amount
Low speed, equivalent to LSP (page 23), but in rpm
Unit: 1 rpm
32-bit word (low order: 8607, high order: 8608)
Adjustment range: 0 to HSP (page 23)
8609 - 6046 / 2 SMAL R/W Max. speed
8610 DSP402: vl velocity max amount
DRIVECOM: Speed max amount
High speed, equivalent to HSP (page 23), but in rpm
Unit: 1 rpm
Adjustment range: LSP (page 23) to tFR (page 27)
8611 - 6048 / 1 SPAL R/W Acceleration - Speed delta
8612 Speed for calculation of acceleration ramp
Unit: 1 rpm
Adjustment range: 1 to 65535
8613 6048 / 2 SPAT R/W Acceleration - Time delta
Time for calculation of acceleration ramp (time to go from 0 to SPAL)
Unit: 1 s
12
DRIVECOM variables

8614 - 6049 / 1 SPDL R/W Deceleration - Speed delta
8615 Speed for calculation of deceleration ramp
Unit: 1 rpm
8616 6049 / 2 SPDT R/W Deceleration - Time delta
Time for calculation of deceleration ramp (time to go from SPDL to 0)
Unit: 1 s
13
Control variables

8501 2037 / 2 CMD R/W Control word
bit 0: "Switch on": active at 1
bit 1: "Disable Voltage": active at 0
bit 2: "Quick Stop": active at 0
bit 3: "Enable Operation": active at 1
bit 7: Fault reset: active on rising edge 0 -> 1
For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L1 or L2:

bit13 = 1: Injection stop command
bit14 = 1: Fast stop command
bit 15: Reserved: set to 0
For "Access level" LAC (page 30) = L3:
Factory assignments
bit 13: No action
bit 14: No action
bit 15: No action
These 5 bits can be assigned to functions.

For example, to use bit 15 to switch the ramp, simply set the "Ramp switching" rPS
configuration parameter (page 33) to Cd15.
8502 2037 / 3 LFr R/W Frequency reference via the bus (signed value)
Unit:
• 1 = 0.1 Hz if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0
8503 2037 / 4 PISP R/W PI regulator reference via the bus
Unit: 0.1%
14
Control variables

8504 2037 / 5 CMI R/W Extended control word
bit 0 = 1: Recall factory settings command. This bit automatically resets to 0 when the request
is taken into account. It is only active when the drive has come to a complete stop:
ETI.4 = ETI.5 = 0.
bit 1 = 1: Save configuration/adjustments in EEPROM if voltage is sufficient (no USF fault). This
bit automatically resets to 0 when the request is taken into account.
During saving (ETI.0 = 1), parameters cannot be written.
bit 4 = 1: Ramp switching command
bits 4 to 8: Reserved
bit 9 = 0: Normal resolution (references, output speed and ouput frequency in physical units:
rpm and Hz)
bit 9 = 1: High resolution (references, output speed and ouput frequency in 32767 points for
600 Hz)
bit 13 = 0: Drive not locked on standstill
bit 13 = 1: Drive locked on standstill
bit 14 = 0: Control with Modbus communication monitoring
bit 14 = 1: Control with no Modbus communication monitoring (NTO)
For safety reasons, inhibiting the Modbus communication fault (NTO) should be
restricted to the debug phase or to special applications.
bit 15 = 0: Parameter consistency check

bit 15 = 1: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill (switching this bit to 0
will revalidate all parameters)
5240 2016 / 29 IOLR R/W Value of logic I/O
(0 = inactive, 1 = active)
bits 0 to 7: Not accessible in write mode
bit 8: Value of "R1" relay output, accessible in write mode if R1 is not assigned
bit 9: Value of "R2" relay output, accessible in write mode if R2 is not assigned
bit 10: Value of "LO" logic output, accessible in write mode if LO is not assigned
bit 14: Not accessible in write mode
bit 15: Reserved
5261 2016 / 3E AO1R R/W Value of the analog output
AO1R is accessible in write mode if dO (page 29) is not assigned
Variation range: 0 to 10000
The value 10000 corresponds to 10V if AO1t = 10U, or to 20 mA if AO1t = OA or 4A (page 28)
15
Monitoring variables

3201 2002 / 2 ETA R Status word
bit 0: Ready to switch on
bit 1: Switched on
bit 2: Operation enabled
bit 3 = 0: No fault
bit 3 = 1: Malfunction, fault present (FAI)
bit 4: Voltage disabled (still equals 0)
bit 5: Quick stop
bit 6: Switch on disabled
bit 7 = 0: No alarm
bit 7 = 1: Alarm present
bit 8: Reserved
bit 9 = 0: Forced local mode in progress (FLO)
bit 9 = 1: No forced local mode
bit 10 = 0: Reference not reached (transient state)
bit 10 = 1: Reference reached (steady state)
bit 11 = 0: LFRD reference normal
bit 11 = 1: LFRD reference exceeded (< LSP or > HSP) Caution: LFRD is expressed in rpm,
LSP and HSP in Hz
bit 14 = 0: No stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote
display terminal
bit 14 = 1: Stop imposed by STOP key on built-in keypad (ATV31...A) or on the remote display
terminal
bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation (output frequency)
bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency)
3202 2002 / 3 rFr R Output frequency applied to the motor (signed value)
Unit:
• 1 = 0.1 Hz if bit 9 of CMI (page 15) = 0
3203 2002 / 4 FrH R Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value)
Unit: 0.1 Hz
3204 2002 / 8 LCr R Current in the motor
Unit: 0.1 A
3205 2002 / 6 Otr R Motor torque
Unit: 1%
100% = Nominal motor torque, calculated using the configuration parameters.
3211 2002 / C OPr R Motor power
Unit: 1%
100% = Nominal motor power, calculated using the configuration parameters.
3207 2002 / 5 ULn R Line voltage
Unit: 0.1 V
(gives the line voltage via the DC bus, motor running or stopped)
3209 2002 / A tHd R Drive thermal state
Unit: 1%
100% = Nominal thermal state
118% = "OHF" threshold (drive overheating)
3210 2002 / B TDM R Max. thermal state reached by the drive
Unit: 1%
118% = "OHF" threshold (drive overheating)
Automatically reset to zero when the drive is powered down.
9630 2042 / 1F tHr R Motor thermal state
Unit: 1%
118% = "OLF" threshold (motor overload)
3231 2002 / 20 rtH R Operating time
Unit: 1 Hour
Factory setting: 0
Total time the motor has been powered up.

Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter (see page 48).
16

12002 205A / 3 USPL R Motor speed in customer units - Low order
Unit: 1
USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS on 32 bits (see pages 25 and 16).
12003 205A / 4 USPH R Motor speed in customer units - High order
Unit: 1
USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS on 32 bits (see pages 25 and 16).
3206 2002 / 7 ETI R Extended status word
bit 0 = 0: Write parameters authorized
bit 0 = 1: Write parameters not authorized (the drive is in the process of saving the current
parameters from the RAM to the EEPROM)
bit 1 = 0: No parameter consistency check + drive locked on standstill
bit 1 = 1: Parameter consistency check
bit 2 = 0: Fault reset not authorized
bit 2 = 1: Fault reset authorized
bit 3: Reserved
bit 4 = 0: Motor stopped
bit 4 = 1: Motor running
bit 5 = 0: No DC injection
bit 5 = 1: DC injection
bit 6 = 0: Drive in steady state
bit 6 = 1: Drive in transient state
bit 7 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm
bit 7 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm
bit 8 = 0: No alarm if excessive braking
bit 8 = 1: Alarm if excessive braking
bit 9 = 0: Drive not accelerating
bit 9 = 1: Drive accelerating
bit 10 = 0: Drive not decelerating
bit 10 = 1: Drive decelerating
bit 11 = 0: No current limit alarm
bit 11 = 1: Current limit alarm
bit 12 = 0: Fast stop not in progress
bit 12 = 1: Fast stop in progress
bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via terminal block or built-in keypad (ATV31....A)
bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via the remote display terminal
bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via ModBus
bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via CanOpen
bit 15 = 0: Forward rotation requested (reference)
bit 15 = 1: Reverse rotation requested (reference)
3250 2002 / 33 LRS1 R Extended status word No. 1
bit 0: Reserved
bit 1 = 0: No drive fault
bit 1 = 1: Drive fault
bit 2 = 0: Motor stopped
bit 2 = 1: Motor running
bit 3: Reserved
bit 4 = 0: Frequency threshold (Ftd) not reached
bit 4 = 1: Frequency threshold (Ftd) reached
bit 5 = 0: High speed not reached
bit 5 = 1: High speed reached
bit 6 = 0: Current threshold (Ctd) not reached
bit 6 = 1: Current threshold (Ctd) reached
bit 7 = 0: Speed reference not reached
bit 7 = 1: Speed reference reached
bit 8 = 0: No motor thermal overload alarm
bit 8 = 1: Motor thermal overload alarm
bit 9 = 0: No brake control (brake engaged)
bit 9 = 1: Brake control in progress (brake released)
bit 12 = 0: No loss of 4-20 mA fault
bit 12 = 1: Loss of 4-20 mA fault
bit 13: Reserved
bit 14 = 0: No drive thermal overload alarm
bit 14 = 1: Drive thermal overload alarm
bit 15: Reserved
17

3252 2002 / 35 LRS3 R Extended status word No. 3
bit 0 = 0: The reference is given by Fr1
bit 0 = 1: The reference is given by Fr2
bit 1 = 0: The command is given by Fr1 or Cd1
bit 1 = 1: The command is given by Fr2 or Cd2
bit 2 = 0: ACC and DEC are used as ramp parameters
bit 2 = 1: ACC2 and DEC2 are used as ramp parameters
bit 3 = 0: CLI is used for current limiting
bit 3 = 1: CL2 is used for current limiting
bit 11 = 0: Motor 1 is not used
bit 11 = 1: Motor 1 is used
bit 12 = 0: Motor 2 is not used
bit 12 = 1: Motor 2 is used
5240 2016 / 29 IOLR R Value of logic I/O
(0 = inactive, 1 = active)
bit 0: Value of logic input "LI1"
bit 1: Value of logic input "LI2"
bit 2: Value of logic input " LI3"
bit 6: Reserved
bit 7: Keypad presence: 0 = absent, 1 = present
bit 8: Value of "R1" relay output, also accessible in write mode if R1 is not assigned
bit 9: Value of "R2" relay output, also accessible in write mode if R2 is not assigned
bit 10: Value of "LO" logic output, also accessible in write mode if LO is not assigned
bit 11: Reserved
bit 12: Reserved
bit 13: Reserved
bit 14: 0 = AOC/AOV logic output, 1 = AOC/AOV analog output
bit 15: Reserved
5241 2016 / 2A AIPC R Value of analog input AIP (ATV31….A drive potentiometer)
Unit: 1 mV
5242 2016 / 2B AI1C R Value of analog input AI1
Unit: 1 mV
5243 2016 / 2C AI2C R Value of analog input AI2
Unit: 1 mV
Variation range: -10000 to 10000
5244 2016 / 2D AI3C R Value of analog input AI3
Unit: 1 µA
5261 2016 / 3E AO1R R Value of the analog output
AO1R is also accessible in write mode if dO (page 29) is not assigned
The value 10000 corresponds to 10V if AO1t = 10U, or to 20 mA if AO1t = OA or 4A (page 28)
18

7121 2029 / 16 LFt R Last fault
The fault remains saved even if the fault disappears, but LFt is reset after powering down the
drive then powering up again.
0 = "nOF": No fault saved
3 = "CFF": Configuration (parameters) incorrect
4 = "CFI": Configuration (parameters) invalid
5 = "SLF": Modbus communication fault
8 = "EPF": External fault
9 = "OCF": Overcurrent fault
10 = "CrF": Capacitor pre-charge fault
13 = "LFF": 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3
16 = "OHF": Drive overheating fault
17 = "OLF": Motor overload fault
18 = "ObF": DC bus overvoltage fault
19 = "OSF": Line supply overvoltage fault
20 = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault
21 = "PHF": Line supply phase loss fault
22 = "USF": Line supply undervoltage fault
23 = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (phase to phase)
24 = "SOF": Motor overspeed fault
25 = "tnF": Auto-tuning fault
26 to 29 = "InF": Internal fault
30 = "EEF": EEPROM memory fault
31 = "SCF": Impeding short-circuit fault
32 = "SCF": Motor short-circuit fault (to earth)
33 = "OPF": Motor phase loss fault - 3 phases
34 = "COF": Communication fault line 2 (CANopen)
35 = "bLF": Brake control fault
36 = "SCF": Power module fault, specific to ATV31pD15p
7201 202A / 2 DP1 R Past fault No. 1
(Same format as "LFt" page 19)
19

7211 202A / C EP1 R Status of past fault No. 1
bit 0 = Same as ETA.1:
- 0: Drive not ready
- 1: Drive ready (RDY)
- 0: Emergency stop in progress
- 1: No emergency stop
- 0: No SWITCH ON DISABLED status
- 1: SWITCH ON DISABLED status
bit 3 = Same as ETA.9: Reserved
- 0: Forward rotation (output frequency)
- 1: Reverse rotation (output frequency)
bit 5 = Same as ETI.4:
- 0: Motor stopped
- 1: Motor running
- 0: No DC injection
- 1: DC injection
- 0: No motor thermal overload alarm
- 1: Motor thermal overload alarm
bit 8 = Same as ETI.8: Reserved
- 0: Drive not accelerating
- 1: Drive accelerating
- 0: Drive not decelerating
- 1: Drive decelerating
- 0: No current limit alarm
- 1: Current limit alarm
bit 12 = Same as ETI.12: Reserved
bits 13 and 14 = Same as ETI.13 and ETI.14:
- bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via terminal block or built-in keypad (ATV31....A)
- bit 14 = 0 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via the remote display terminal
- bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 0: ATV controlled via ModBus
- bit 14 = 1 and bit 13 = 1: ATV controlled via CanOpen
- 0: Forward rotation requested (reference)
- 1: Reverse rotation requested (reference)
7212 202A / D EP2 R Status of past fault No. 2
(Same format as "EP1")
7213 202A / E EP3 R Status of past fault No. 3
7214 202A / F EP4 R Status of past fault No. 4
6056 201E / 39 ErCO R CANopen: error word
Unit: 1
Range: 0 to 4
0: "No error"
1: "Bus off error"
2: "Life time error"
3: "CAN overrun"
4: "Heartbeat error"
8541 2037 / 2A CMI1 R Image of Modbus extended control word
(received by the Modbus channel)
Identical to CMI (page 15).
20

8542 2037 / 2B CMI2 R Image of CANopen extended control word
(received by the CANopen channel)
Identical to CMI (page 15).
8521 2037 / 16 LFR1 R Image of Modbus frequency reference
Identical to LFr (page 14).
8522 2037 / 17 LFR2 R Image of CANopen frequency reference
Identical to LFr (page 14).
8631 2038 / 20 LFD1 R Image of Modbus speed reference
Speed reference received by the Modbus channel
Identical to LFRD (page 11)
8632 2038 / 21 LFD2 R Image of CANopen speed reference
Speed reference received by the CANopen channel
Identical to LFRD (page 11)
8531 2037 / 20 PIR1 R Image of Modbus PI reference
Identical to PISP (page 14).
8532 2037 / 21 PIR2 R Image of CANopen PI reference
Identical to PISP (page 14).
21
Identification variables

3011 2000 / C NCV R Drive rating
0 = unknown
1 = 018 (0.18 kW)
2 = 037 (0.37 kW)
3 = 055 (0.55 kW)
4 = 075 (0.75 kW)
5 = U11 (1.1 kW)
6 = U15 (1.5 kW)
7 = U22 (2.2 kW)
8 = U30 (3 kW)
9 = U40 (4 kW)
10 = U55 (5.5 kW)
11 = U75 (7.5 kW)
12 = D11 (11 kW)
13 = D15 (15 kW)
3012 2000 / D VCAL R Drive voltage
0 = unknown
1 = M2 (200...240 V single phase)
2 = M3X (200...240 V 3-phase)
3 = N4 (380...500 V 3-phase)
4 = S6X (525...600 V 3-phase)
3017 2000 / 12 INV R Nominal drive current
Unit: 0.1 A
3010 2000 / B ZON R Drive type
0 = unknown
1 = ATV31……(drive without built-in keypad)
3 = ATV31……(drive with built-in keypad)
3401 2004 / 2 TSP R Drive firmware type
The firmware type is specified by an ASCII letter
"A": Standard firmware
3302 2000 / 4 UdP R Drive firmware version
Coded on 2 bytes.
- low order byte: firmware upgrade index (UI) in hexadecimal format
- high order byte: firmware version (V) in hexadecimal format
Example : For V1.2 IE04, UdP = 16#1204
22
Configuration and adjustment variables

3105 2001 / 6 LSP R/W Low speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: 0
Adjustment range: 0 to HSP
(Motor frequency at min. reference)
3104 2001 / 5 HSP R/W High speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500, if bFr = 60: 600
Adjustment range: LSP to tFr
(Motor frequency at max. reference): Ensure that this setting is suitable for the motor and the
application.
9622 2042 / 17 ItH R/W Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current
Unit: 0.1 A
Factory setting: According to drive rating
Adjustment range: 0.2 to 1.5 In (1)
Set ItH to the nominal current on the motor rating plate.
Please refer to OLL on page 47 if you wish to suppress thermal protection.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the
drive rating plate.
9623 2042 / 18 UFr R/W IR compensation/Voltage boost
Unit: 1%
Factory setting: 20
- For UFt (page 27) = n or nLd: IR compensation
- For UFt = L or P: Voltage boost
Used to optimize torque at very low speed (increase UFr if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the value of UFr is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability).
Modifying UFt (page 27) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%).
9620 2042 / 15 FLG R/W Frequency loop gain
Unit: 1%
Factory setting: 20
Parameter active only if UFt (page 27) = n or nLd.
The FLG parameter adjusts the following of the speed ramp on the basis of the inertia of the
machine being driven.
Too high a gain may result in operating instability.
9621 2042 / 16 StA R/W Frequency loop stability
Unit: 1%
Factory setting: 20
Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration),
according to the dynamics of the machine.
Gradually increase the stability to avoid any overspeed.
9625 2042 / 1A SLP R/W Slip compensation
Unit: 1%
Factory setting: 100
Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by nominal motor speed.
The speeds given on motor rating plates are not necessarily exact.
If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
11301 2053 / 2 JPF R/W Skip frequency
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: 0
Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JPF. This function
prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
23

11302 2053 / 3 JF2 R/W 2nd skip frequency
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: 0
Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JF2. This function
prevents a critical speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
9201 203E / 2 CLI R/W Current limit
Unit: 0.1 A
Factory setting: 1.5 In (1)
drive rating plate.
11701 2057 / 2 tLS R/W Low speed operating time
Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 0 (no time limit)
Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The
motor restarts if the frequency reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still
present.
Caution, value 0 corresponds to an unlimited time.
11003 2050 / 4 Ftd R/WS Motor frequency threshold
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: bFr
Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = FtA) closes or output AOV
= 10 V (dO = StA)
11002 2050 / 3 ttd R/WS Motor thermal state threshold
Unit: 1%
Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = tSA) closes or output
AOV = 10 V (dO = tSA)
11001 2050 / 2 Ctd R/WS Motor current threshold
Unit: 0.1 A
Factory setting: In (1)
Adjustment range: 0 to 1.5 In (1)
Motor current threshold above which the relay contact (R1 or R2 = CtA) closes or output AOV
= 10 V (dO = CtA)
drive rating plate.
24

12001 205A / 2 SdS R/W USPL/USPH scale factor
(USPL/USPH = rFr x SdS) See USPL/USPH page 17.
Unit: 0.1
This parameter also affects the display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 in the SUP- menu
(See Programming Manual)
3015 2000 / 10 bFr R/WS Standard motor frequency
Factory setting: 0
0 = "50"
1 = "60"
50 Hz: IEC
60 Hz: NEMA
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 23, Ftd page 24, FrS
page 25 and tFr page 27.
9601 2042 / 2 UnS R/WS Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate
Unit: 1 V
Adjustment range according to drive rating:
ATV31ppp M2: 100 to 240 V
ATV31ppp M3X: 100 to 240 V
ATV31ppp N4: 100 to 500 V
ATV31ppp S6X: 100 to 600 V
9602 2042 / 3 FrS R/WS Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500 if bFr = 60: 600
UnS (in volts)
The ratio must not exceed the following values:
FrS (in Hz)
ATV31ppp M2: 7 max.
ATV31ppp M3X: 7 max.
ATV31ppp N4: 14 max.
ATV31ppp S6X: 17 max.
9603 2042 / 4 nCr R/WS Nominal motor current given on the rating plate
Unit: 0.1 A
drive rating plate.
25

9604 2042 / 5 nSP R/WS Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate
Unit: 1 rpm
Adjustment range: 0 to 32767 RPM
0 to 9999 RPM then 10.00 to 32.76 KRPM
If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip
in Hz or as a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows:
100 - slip as a %
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
100
or
50 - slip in Hz
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
50
or
60 - slip in Hz
60
9606 2042 / 7 COS R/WS Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate
Unit: 0.01
9643 2042 / 2C rSC R/WS Cold state stator resistance
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": Function inactive. For applications which do not require high performance or do not
tolerate automatic auto-tuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is
powered up.
1 = "InIt": Activates the function. To improve low-speed performance whatever the thermal state
of the motor.
>1 =" XXXX"
XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used, in mΩ.
Caution:
It is strongly recommended that this function is activated for Lifting and Handling applications.
The function should be activated (InIt) only when the motor is in cold state.
When rSC = InIt, parameter tUn is forced to POn. At the next run command or the next
power-up, the stator resistance is measured with an auto-tune. Parameter rSC then changes
to this value (XXXX) and maintains it; tUn remains forced to POn. Parameter rSC remains at
InIt as long as the measurement has not been performed.
Value XXXX can be forced or changed using the keys.
XXXX corresponds to half the resistance measured between 2 phases.
9608 2042 / 9 tUn R/WO Motor control auto-tuning
Factory setting: 0
It is essential that all the motor parameters (UnS, FrS, nCr, nSP, COS) are correctly configured
before performing the auto-tuning.
0 = "nO": Auto-tuning not performed.

112 = "YES": Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically
switches to dOnE or nO in the event of a fault (the tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES, see
page 48).
113 = "dOnE": Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed.
114 = "rUn": Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent.
115 = "POn": Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up.
129 = "LI1": Logic input LI1
LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed on the transition from 0 V 1 of a logic input assigned to this
function.
Caution:
tUn is forced to POn if rSC is other than nO.
Auto-tuning is only performed if no command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast
stop" function has been assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt; wait for the display to change to
"dOnE" or "nO".
During auto-tuning the motor operates at nominal current.
26

9609 2042 / A tUS R Auto-tuning status
Factory setting: 0
0 =" tAb": The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
1 = "PEnd": Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
2 = "PrOG": Auto-tuning in progress.
3 = "FAIL": Auto-tuning has failed.
4 = "dOnE": The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the
motor.
5 = "Strd": The cold state stator resistance (rSC other than nO) is used to control the motor.
9607 2042 / 8 UFt R/WS Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio
Factory setting: 2
0 = "L": Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors
1 = "P": Variable torque for pump and fan applications
2 = "n": Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications
3 = "nLd": Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves
in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load).
3107 2001 / 8 nrd R/WS Random switching frequency
Factory setting: 1
0 = "nO": Fixed frequency
1 = "YES": Frequency with random modulation
Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency.
3102 2001 / 3 SFr R/W Switching frequency
Unit: 0.1 kHz
Factory setting: 40
The frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor.
If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of excessive
temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it
again once the temperature has returned to normal.
3103 2001 / 4 tFr R/WS Maximum output frequency
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: if BFR = 50: 600 if BFR = 60: 720
9101 203D / 2 SrF R/WS Suppression of the speed loop filter
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference being exceeded).
1 = "YES": The speed loop filter is suppressed (in position control applications, this reduces the
response time and the reference may be exceeded).
8001 2032 / 2 SCS R/WS Saving the configuration
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": Function inactive
2 = "Str1": Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM.
SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is
used to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration.
When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both
initialized with the factory configuration.
If the remote display terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection
options will appear:
11 = "FIL1"
12 = "FIL2"
13 = "FIL3"
14 = "FIL4"
FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 are files available in the remote display terminal’s EEPROM memory for
saving the current configuration. They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different
configurations which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same
rating.
SCS automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed.
27

8002 2032 / 3 FCS R/WS Return to factory settings/Restore configuration
Factory setting: 0
2 = "rEC1": The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously
saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically
changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed.
64 = "InI": The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically
If the remote display terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection
options appear, as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote display
terminal’s EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files):
11 = "FIL1": display terminal file 1 not empty
They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may
be loaded on the remote display terminal.
FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed.
11101 2051 / 2 tCC R/WS 2-wire/3-wire control
(Type of control)
Factory setting: 0 except for ATV31ppp A: 2
Control configuration:
0 = "2C" = 2-wire control: The open or closed state of the input controls running or stopping.
1 = "3C" = 3-wire control (pulse control): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to control
starting, a "stop" pulse is sufficient to control stopping.
2 = "LOC "= local control (drive RUN/STOP/RESET) for ATV31ppp A only (inactive if LAC = L3,
see page 30).
Changing the assignment of tCC returns the following functions to their factory setting:
rrS, tCt and all functions affecting logic inputs.
11102 2051 / 3 tCt R/WS Type of 2-wire control
(parameter active only if tCC = 2C)
Factory setting: 1
0 = "LEL ": State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop.
1 = "trn": A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to
prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply.
2 = "PFO": State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the "forward" input always takes
priority over the "reverse" input.
11105 2051 / 6 rrS R/WS Reverse operation via logic input
Factory setting:
- if tCC = 0: 130
- if tCC = 1: 131
- if tCC = 2: 0
If rrS = nO, reverse operation is active, by means of negative voltage on AI2 for example.
0 = "nO": Not assigned
4434 200E / 23 CrL3 R/WS Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3
Unit: 0.1 mA
Factory setting: 40
CrL3 and CrH3 are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-4 mA, etc.
4444 200E / 2D CrH3 R/WS Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3
Unit: 0.1 mA
CrL3 and CrH3 are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-4 mA, etc.
4601 2010 / 2 AO1t R/WS Configuration of the analog output
Factory setting: 2
1 = "10U": 0 - 10 V configuration (use terminal AOV)
2 = "0A": 0 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC)
3 = "4A": 4 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC)
28

5031 2014 / 20 dO R/WS Analog/logic output AOC/AOV
Factory setting: 0
For the following assignments the output is analog type:
129 = "OCr": Motor current. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive current.
130 = "OFr": Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page
27).
132 = "Otr": Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque.
139 = "OPr": Power supplied by the drive. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive
power.
For the following assignments the output is logic type (see diagram in the Installation Manual):
With these assignments, configure AO1t = 0A.
1 = "FLt": Drive fault

2 = "rUn": Drive running
4 = "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24)
5 = "FLA": High speed (HSP) reached
6 = "CtA": Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter page 24)
7 = "SrA": Frequency reference reached
8 = "tSA": Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter page 24)
9 = "bLC": Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or
deactivated via the bLC parameter page 42)
12 = "APL": Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 48)
The logic output is in state 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active, with the exception
of FLt (state 1 if the drive is not faulty).
5001 2014 / 2 r1 R/WS Relay r1
Factory setting: 1
4= "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24)
The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt
(powered up if the drive is not faulty).
5002 2014 / 3 r2 R/WS Relay r2
Factory setting: 0
4 = "FtA": Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter page 24)
9 = "bLC": Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or
deactivated via the bLC parameter page 42)
The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt
(powered up if the drive is not faulty).
29

3006 2000 / 7 LAC R/WS Function access level
Factory setting: 0
0 = "L1": Access to standard functions. Significantly, this level is interchangeable with ATV28.
1 = "L2": Access to advanced functions:
- +/- speed (motorized potentiometer)
- Brake control
- Switching for second current limit
- Motor switching
- Management of limit switches
2 = L3: Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes.
Assigning LAC to L3 will restore the factory settings of the Fr1 (below), Cd1 (page 31),
CHCF (page 31), and tCC (page 28) parameters. The latter is forced to "2C" on
ATV31 pppA.
L3 can only be restored to L2 or L1 and L2 to L1 by means of a "factory setting" via
FCS (page 28).
8413 2036 / E Fr1 R/WS Configuration reference 1
Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31pppp A: 16
1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1
16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only)
If LAC = L2 or L3, the following additional assignments are possible:
160 = "UPdt": (1) + speed/- speed via LI

161 = "UpdH": (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or
r
remote display terminal. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 16)
If LAC = L3, the following additional assignments are possible:
163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter page 14.
164 = "Mdb": Reference via Modbus
167 = "CAn": Reference via CANopen
(1) Caution, you cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time.
Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel.
8414 2036 / F Fr2 R/WS Configuration reference 2
Factory setting: 0
16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only)
160 = "UPdt": (1) + speed/- speed via LI

161 = "UpdH": (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or
r
remote display terminal. For operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 16)
163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter page 14.
(1) Caution, you cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time.
Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is permitted on each reference channel.
30

8411 2036 / C rFC R/WS Reference switching
Factory setting: 96
Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control
bit for remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2.
96 = "Fr1": Reference = Reference 1
97 = "Fr2": Reference = Reference 2
187 = "C111": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus
203 = "C211": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by CANopen
The reference can be switched with the drive running.

Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0.
Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1.
Switching channel may result in a change of direction of motor rotation.
8401 2036 / 2 CHCF R/WS Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels)
Factory setting: 1
Active if LAC = L3
1 = "SIM": Combined
2 = "SEP": Separate
8423 2036 / 18 Cd1 R/WS Configuration of control channel 1
Active if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3
1 = "tEr": Terminal block control
2 = "LOC": Keypad control (ATV31pppA only)
3 = "LCC": Remote display terminal control
10 = "Mdb": Control via Modbus
20 = "CAn": Control via CAN
8424 2036 / 19 Cd2 R/WS Configuration of control channel 2
Factory setting: 10
1 = "tEr": Terminal block control
2 = "LOC": Keypad control (ATV31pppA only)
3 = "LCC": Remote display terminal control
10 = "Mdb": Control via Modbus
20 = "CAn": Control via CAN
31

8421 2036 / 16 CCS R/WS Control channel switching
Factory setting: 98
Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a
control bit for remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2.
98 = "Cd1": Control channel = Channel 1
99 = "Cd2": Control channel = Channel 2
Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 0.

Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is at state 1.
Switching channel may result in a change of direction of motor rotation.
8402 2036 / 3 COP R/WS Copy channel 1 to channel 2

Factory setting: 0
Active if LAC = L3
Copying is only performed from channel 1 to channel 2.
0 = "nO": No copy
1 = "SP": Copy reference
2 = "Cd": Copy control
3 = "ALL": Copy control and reference
Exceptions:
• If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block (2-wire or 3-wire control), channel 1 control is
not copied.
• If channel 2 reference is set via analog input (AI1, AI2, AI3 or AIP), channel 1 reference is
not copied.
Reference copied:
• If channel 2 is the +/- speed type, the output frequency applied to the motor (rFr) is copied.
• In other cases (built-in keypad, remote display terminal or communication bus), the reference
before ramp (FrH) is copied.
Note: If channel 2 is a communication bus, the copy is "overwritten" as soon as a new control
or reference is received by the bus.
64003 2262 / 4 LCC R/WS Control via remote display terminal
Factory setting: 0
Parameter active only with the remote display terminal option and if LAC = L1 or L2.
1 = "YES": Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET, RUN and FWD/REV buttons
on the display terminal. The speed reference is then given by parameter LFr page 14. Only the
freewheel, fast stop and DC injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the
drive/terminal connection is cut or if the terminal has not been connected, the drive locks in an
SLF fault.
64002 2262 / 3 PSt R/WS Stop priority
Factory setting: 1
This function gives priority to the STOP key on the keypad (ATV31 pppA only) or the STOP key
on the remote display terminal, regardless of the control channel (terminal block or
communication bus).
1 = "YES": STOP key priority
32

64001 2262 / 2 rOt R/WS Direction of operation authorized
Factory setting: 0
Direction of operation authorized for the RUN key on the keypad (ATV31ppp A only) or the RUN
key on the remote display terminal.
0 = "dFr": Forward
1 = "drS": Reverse
2 = "bOt": Both directions are authorized (except for the keypad on the ATV31ppp A: Forward
only).
9004 203C / 5 rPt R/WS Type of ramp
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps.
Factory setting: 0
0 = "LIn": Linear
1 = "S": S ramp
2 = "U": U ramp
3 = "CUS": Customized
9005 203C / 6 tA1 R/W Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded
Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time ACC or AC2)
Factory setting: 10
9006 203C / 7 tA2 R/W End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded
Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time ACC or AC2)
Factory setting: 10
Adjustment range: 0 to 100 - tA1
9007 203C / 8 tA3 R/W Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded
Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time dEC or dE2)
Factory setting: 10
9008 203C / 9 tA4 R/W End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded
Unit: 1% (as % of total ramp time dEC or dE2)
Factory setting: 10
Adjustment range: 0 to 100 - tA3
9001 203C / 2 ACC R/W Acceleration ramp time
Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 30
Defined for accelerating between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (page 25).
9002 203C / 3 dEC R/W Deceleration ramp time
Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 30
Defined for decelerating between the nominal frequency FrS (page 25) and 0.
Check that the value of dEC is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.
9010 203C / B rPS R/WS Ramp switching
Factory setting: 0
This function remains active regardless of the control channel.
If LAC = L3, the following assignments are possible:
171 = "Cd11": bit 11 of the CMD control word (page 14) written by Modbus or CANopen
ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0.
AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1.
33

9011 203C / C Frt R/WS Ramp switching threshold
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: 0
The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 (0 deactivates the function) and
the output frequency is greater than Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with switching via LI or bit as follows:
LI or bit Frequency Ramp
0 <Frt ACC, dEC
0 >Frt AC2, dE2
1 <Frt AC2, dE2
1 >Frt AC2, dE2
9012 203C / D AC2 R/W 2nd acceleration ramp time

Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 50
Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt).
9013 203C / E dE2 R/W 2nd deceleration ramp time
Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 50
Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency threshold (Frt).
9003 203C / 4 brA R/WS Deceleration ramp adaptation
Factory setting: 1
Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at too
low a value for the inertia of the load.
1 = "YES": Function active. The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
- positioning on a ramp
- the use of a braking resistor (no guarantee of the function operating correctly)
brA is forced to nO if brake control bLC is assigned (page 42).
11201 2052 / 2 Stt R/WS Normal stop mode
Factory setting: 0
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.
0 = "rMP": On ramp
1 = "FSt": Fast stop
2 = "nSt": Freewheel stop
3 = "dCI": DC injection stop
11204 2052 / 5 FSt R/WS Fast stop via logic input
Factory setting: 0
The stop is activated when the logic state of the input changes to 0 and the control word bit
changes to 1. The fast stop is a stop on a reduced ramp via parameter dCF. If the input falls
back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level
control has been configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 28). In other cases, a
new run command must be sent.
34

11230 2052 / 1F dCF R/WS Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 4
Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.
The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp.
11203 2052 / 4 dCI R/WS DC injection via logic input
Factory setting: 0
Braking is activated when the logic state of the input or control word bit is at 1.
11210 2052 / B IdC R/W Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode
Caution: This setting is not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function.
Unit: 0.1 A
Adjustment range: 0 to In (1)
After 5 seconds the injection current is peak limited at 0.5 Ith if it is set at a higher value.
drive rating plate.
11211 2052 / C tdC R/W Total DC injection braking time selected as normal stop mode
Caution: This setting is not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function.
Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 5
11202 2052 / 3 nSt R/WS Freewheel stop via logic input
Factory setting: 0
The stop is activated when the logic state of the input is at 0. If the input falls back to state 1
and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been
configured. In other cases, a new run command must be sent.
10401 204A / 2 AdC R/W Automatic standstill DC injection
(at the end of the ramp)
Factory setting: 1
0 = "nO": No injection
1 = "YES": Standstill injection for adjustable period
2 = "Ct": Continuous standstill injection
This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been
sent.
35

10402 204A / 3 tdC1 R/W Automatic standstill DC injection time
Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 50
10403 204A / 4 SdC1 R/W Level of automatic standstill DC injection current
Unit: 0.1 A
Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and
on the drive rating plate.
nd
10404 204A / 5 tdC2 R/W 2 automatic standstill DC injection time
Unit: 0.1 s
Factory setting: 0
10405 204A / 6 SdC2 R/W 2nd level of standstill DC injection current
Unit: 0.1 A
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and
on the drive rating plate.
11801 2058 / 2 SA2 R/WS Summing input 2
Factory setting: 2
Can be used to sum one or two inputs to reference Fr1 only.
16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only)
163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu
page 14.
11802 2058 / 3 SA3 R/WS Summing input 3
Factory setting: 0
16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only)
163 = "LCC": Reference via the remote display terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu
page 14.
36

11401 2054 / 2 PS2 R/WS 2 preset speeds
Factory setting: if tCC = 1: 0 if tCC = 0 or 2: 131
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function.
Factory setting: if tCC = 1: 0 if tCC = 0 or 2: 132
Check that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4.

Factory setting: 0

37

Factory setting: 0

11410 2054 / B SP2 R/W 2nd preset speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11411 2054 / C SP3 R/W 3rd preset speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11412 2054 / D SP4 R/W 4th preset speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11413 2054 / E SP5 R/W 5th preset speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11414 2054 / F SP6 R/W 6th preset speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11415 2054 / 10 SP7 R/W 7th preset speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11418 2054 / 13 SP10 R/W 10 th preset speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Unit: 0.1 Hz
38

Unit: 0.1 Hz
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11110 2051 / B JOG R/WS Jog operation
Factory setting: if tCC = 0 or 2: 0 if tCC = 1: 132
11111 2051 / C JGF R/W Jog operation reference
Unit: 0.1 Hz
11501 2055 / 2 USP R/WS + speed (motorized potentiometer)
Factory setting: 0
Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdt has been selected (see page 30).
11502 2055 / 3 dSP R/WS - speed (motorized potentiometer)
Factory setting: 0
Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdt has been selected (see page 30).
39

11503 2055 / 4 Str R/WS Save reference
Factory setting: 0
Associated with the "+/- speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
- When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM)
- When the line supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM)
On the next start-up, the speed reference is the last reference saved.
0 = "nO": No save
1 = "rAM": Save to RAM
2 = "EEP": Save to EEPROM
11901 2059 / 2 PIF R/WS PI regulator feedback
Factory setting: 0
11941 2059 / 2A rPG R/W PI regulator proportional gain
Unit: 0.01
Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback.
11942 2059 / 2B rIG R/W PI regulator integral gain
Unit: 0.01
Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback.
11903 2059 / 4 FbS R/W PI feedback multiplication coefficient
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 10
For process adaptation
11940 2059 / 29 PIC R/W Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": normal
1 = "YES": reverse
11909 2059 / A Pr2 R/WS 2 preset PI references
Factory setting: 0
40

11910 2059 / B Pr4 R/WS 4 preset PI references
Factory setting: 0
Check that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4.

11921 2059 / 16 rP2 R/W 2nd preset PI reference
Unit: 0.1%
Only active if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input.
11922 2059 / 17 rP3 R/W 3rd preset PI reference
Unit: 0.1%
11923 2059 / 18 rP4 R/W 4th preset PI reference
Unit: 0.1%
11960 2059 / 3D rSL RW0 Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold)
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0
If the "PI" and "Low speed operating time"(tLS) (see page 24) functions are configured at the
same time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP.
This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting, operating at low speed then
stopping, and so on…
Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold for
restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP.
The function is inactive if tLS = 0.
11908 2059 / 9 PII R/WS Internal PI regulator reference
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": The PI regulator reference is Fr1, except for UPdH and UPdt (+/- speed cannot be
used as the PI regulator reference).
1 = "YES": The PI regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI.
11920 2059 / 15 rPI R/W Internal PI regulator reference
Unit: 0.1%
Factory setting: 0
41

10001 2046 / 2 bLC R/WS Brake control configuration
Factory setting: 0
Function active only if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 30).
2 = "r2": Relay R2
64 = "dO": Logic output AOC
If bLC is assigned, parameters FLr (page 46) and brA (page 34) are forced to nO, and
parameter OPL (page 47) is forced to YES.
bLC is forced to nO if OPL = OAC (page 46).
10002 2046 / 3 brL R/WS Brake release frequency
Unit: 0.1 Hz
10006 2046 / 7 Ibr R/WS Motor current threshold for brake release
Unit: 0.1 A
drive rating plate.
10004 2046 / 5 brt R/WS Brake release time
Unit: 0.01 s
Factory setting: 50
10003 2046 / 4 bEn R/WS Brake engage frequency threshold
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Adjustment range: 0 to LSP
65535 = "nO": Not set
0 to LSP: Adjustment range in Hz
If bLC is assigned and bEn still equals nO, the drive will lock on a bLF fault on the first run
command.
10005 2046 / 6 bEt R/WS Brake engage time
Unit: 0.01 s
Factory setting: 50
10007 2046 / 8 bIP R/WS Brake release pulse
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the direction
of rotation commanded.
1 = "YES": Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is always forward,
regardless of the direction of operation commanded.
Check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward
direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases.
42

9202 203E / 3 LC2 R/WS Switching for second current limit
Factory setting: 0
CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 0 (page 24).
CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is at state 1 (page 43).
9203 203E / 4 CL2 R/W 2nd current limit
Unit: 0.1 A
drive rating plate.
8011 2032 / C CHP R/WS Switching, motor 2
Factory setting: 0
LI or bit = 0: Motor 1
- The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. An external means
of motor thermal protection must therefore be provided.
- If you use this function, do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 26) on motor
2 and do not configure tUn = rUn or POn.
- Changes to parameters are only taken into account when the drive is locked.
9701 2043 / 2 UnS2 R/WS Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the rating plate
Unit: 1 V
Adjustment range: According to drive rating:
ATV31ppp M2: 100 to 240 V
ATV31ppp M3X: 100 to 240 V
ATV31ppp N4: 100 to 500 V
ATV31ppp S6X: 100 to 600 V
43

9702 2043 / 3 FrS2 R/WS Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the rating plate
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Factory setting: if bFr = 50: 500 if bFr = 60: 600
UnS (in volts)
FrS (in Hz)
ATV31ppp M2: 7 max.
ATV31ppp M3X: 7 max.
ATV31ppp N4: 14 max.
ATV31ppp S6X: 17 max.
9703 2043 / 4 nCr2 R/WS Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the rating plate
Unit: 0.1 A
drive rating plate.
9704 2043 / 5 nSP2 R/WS Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the rating plate
Unit: 1 rpm
If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip
in Hz or as a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows:
100 - slip as a %
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
100
or
50 - slip in Hz
50
or
60 - slip in Hz
60
9706 2043 / 7 COS2 R/WS Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating plate
Unit: 0.01
9707 2043 / 8 UFt2 R/W Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2
Factory setting: 2
0 = "L": Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors
1 = "P": Variable torque for pump and fan applications
2 = "n": Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications
3 = "nLd": Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves
in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load).
9723 2043 / 18 UFr2 R/W IR compensation/Voltage boost, motor 2
Unit: 1%
Factory setting: 20
For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost.
Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the value of UFr2 is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability).
Modifying UFt2 will cause UFr2 to return to the factory setting (20%).
9720 2043 / 15 FLG2 R/W Frequency loop gain, motor 2
Unit: 1%
Factory setting: 20
Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd. The FLG2 parameter adjusts the drive’s ability to
follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine being driven.
44

9721 2043 / 16 StA2 R/W Frequency loop stability, motor 2
Unit: 1%
Factory setting: 20
Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd.
Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration),
according to the dynamics of the machine.
9725 2043 / 1A SLP2 R/W Slip compensation, motor 2
Unit: 1%
Parameter active only if UFt2 = n or nLd. Used to adjust the slip compensation value fixed by
nominal motor speed.
If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
11601 2056 / 2 LAF R/WS Limit, forward direction
Factory setting: 0
11602 2056 / 3 LAr R/WS Limit, reverse direction
Factory setting: 0
11603 2056 / 4 LAS R/WS Type of limit switch stop
Factory setting: 2
0 = "rMP": On ramp
1 = "FSt": Fast stop
2 = "nSt": Freewheel stop
45

7122 2029 / 17 Atr R/WS Automatic restart
Factory setting: 0
1 = "YES": Automatic restart, after locking on a fault, if the fault has disappeared and the other
operating conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic
attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 min for the
following periods.
If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed, the procedure is
aborted and the drive remains locked until it is powered down then powered up.
The following faults permit this function:
- External fault (EPF)
- Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF)
- CANopen fault (COF)
- Line overvoltage (OSF)
- Loss of a line phase (PHF)
- Loss of a motor phase (OPF)
- DC bus overvoltage (ObF)
- Motor overload (OLF)
- Serial link (SLF)
- Drive overheating (OHF)
The drive safety relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the
operating direction must be maintained.
Use 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 28).
Check that an automatic restart does not present any danger to personnel or
equipment.
7123 2029 / 18 tAr R/WS Max. duration of restart process
Factory setting: 0
0 = "5" : 5 minutes
1 = "10" : 10 minutes
2 = "30" : 30 minutes
3 = "1h": 1 hour
4 = "2h": 2 hours
5 = "3h": 3 hours
6 = "Ct": Unlimited
This parameter is active if Atr = YES. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts
on a recurrent fault.
7124 2029 / 19 rSF R/WS Reset of current fault
Factory setting: 0
3110 2001 / B FLr R/WS Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp)
Factory setting: 0
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
- Loss of line supply or disconnection
- Reset of current fault or automatic restart
- Freewheel stop
The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the
restart, then follows the ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO.
1 = "YES": Function active
When the function is operational, it activates on each restart following one of the above events,
resulting in a slight delay (1 second max).
FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 42).
46

7131 2029 / 20 EtF R/WS External fault
Factory setting: 0
7006 2028 / 7 EPL R/WS Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF
Factory setting: 1
0 = "nO": Fault ignored
1 = "YES": Fault with freewheel stop
6 = "rMP": Fault with stop on ramp
7 = "FSt": Fault with fast stop
9611 2042 / C OPL R/WS Configuration of motor phase loss fault
Factory setting: 1
1 = "YES": Triggering of OPF fault
2 = "OAC": No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an
overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-established and flying restart even if FLr = nO.
To be used with downstream contactor.
OPL is forced to YES if brake control bLC is assigned (page 42).
If OPL = OAC, bLC is forced to nO (page 42).
7002 2028 / 3 IPL R/WS Configuration of line phase loss fault
Factory setting: 1 except for ATV31ppp M2: 0
This parameter is only active on 3-phase drives.
1 = "YES": Fault with fast stop
7008 2028 / 9 OHL R/WS Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF
Factory setting: 1
7009 2028 / A OLL R/WS Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF
Factory setting: 1
7010 2028 / B SLL R/WS Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF
Factory setting: 1
7011 2028 / C COL R/WS Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF
Factory setting: 1
47

7012 2028 / D tnL R/WS Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF
Factory setting: 1
0 = "nO": Fault ignored (the drive reverts to the factory settings)
1 = "YES": Fault with drive locked.
If rSC (see page 26) is other than nO, tnL is forced to YES.
7003 2028 / 4 LFL R/WS Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault LFF
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 y 3 mA, see page 28)
4 = "LFF": The drive switches to the fallback speed (LFF parameter)
5 ="rLS": The drive maintains the speed at which it was travelling when the fault occurred until
the fault has disappeared.
The factory setting of LFL is forced to YES if CrH3 < CrL3 (see page 28) and nO is impossible.
Before setting LFL to YES, rMP or FSt, check the connection of input AI3. Otherwise,
the drive may immediately switch to an LFF fault.
7080 2028 / 51 LFF R/WS Fallback speed
Unit: 0.1 Hz
Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault
7007 2028 / 8 drn R/WS Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage
Factory setting: 0
1 = "YES": The line voltage monitoring threshold is:
ATV31ppp M2: 130 V
ATV31ppp M3X: 130 V
ATV31ppp N4: 270 V
ATV31ppp S6X: 340 V
In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed.
7004 2028 / 5 StP R/WS Controlled stop on mains power break
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor
1 = "MMS": This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as
possible.
2 = "rMP": Stop according to the valid ramp (dEC or dE2)
3 = "FSt": Fast stop, the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive.
7125 2029 / 1A InH R/WS Fault inhibit
Factory setting: 0
Inhibiting faults may damage the drive beyond repair. This would invalidate the
guarantee.

Fault monitoring is active when the input is at state 0.

It is inactive when the input is at state 1.
All active faults are reset on a rising edge (from 0 to 1) of the input.
3120 2001 / 15 rPr R/WS Operating time reset to zero
Factory setting: 0
0 = "nO": No
2 = "rtH": Operating time reset to zero
The rPr parameter automatically falls back to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed.
48

6001 201E / 2 Add R/WS Modbus: Drive address
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 1
6001 201E / 2 Add R/WS Modbus: Drive address
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 1
6003 201E / 4 tbr R/WS Modbus: Transmission speed
Factory setting: 32
24 = "4.8" : 4800 bps
28 = "9.6" : 9600 bps
32 = "19.2": 19200 bps (Caution: The remote display terminal can only be used with this value.)
6004 201E / 5 tFO R/WS Modbus: communication format
Factory setting: 3
2 = "8O1": 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
3 = "8E1": 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit (Caution: The remote display terminal can only be
used with this value.)
4 = "8n1": 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
5 = "8n2": 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
6005 201E / 6 ttO R/WS Modbus: Time-out
Unit: 0.1 s
6051 201E / 34 AdCO R/WS CANopen: Drive address
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
6053 201E / 36 bdCO R/WS CANopen: Transmission speed
Factory setting: 52
30 = "10.0": 10 kbps
34 = "20.0": 20 kbps
38 = "50.0": 50 kbps
52 = "125.0": 125 kbps
60 = "250.0": 250 kbps
68 = "500.0": 500 kbps
76 = "1000": 1000 kbps
8431 2036 / 20 FLO R/WS Forced local mode
Factory setting: 0
In forced local mode, the terminal block or display terminal regains control of the drive.
8432 2036 / 21 FLOC R/WS Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode
Active only if LAC = 3
In forced local mode, only the speed reference is taken into account. PI functions, summing
inputs, etc. are not active.
1 = "AI1": Analog input AI1, logic inputs LI
16 = "AIP": Potentiometer (type A drives only), RUN, STOP buttons
163 = "LCC": Remote display terminal: LFr reference page 14, RUN, STOP, FWD/REV buttons.
49

3003 2000 / 4 COd R/W Display terminal locking code
Caution: Before entering a code, do not forget to make a careful note of it.
0 = OFF: No access locking codes

- To lock access, enter a code (2 to 9999). "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the
parameters have been locked.
1 = On: A code is locking access (2 to 9999)
- To unlock access, enter the code. The code remains on the display and access is unlocked
until the next power down. Parameter access will be locked again on the next power-up.
- If an incorrect code is entered, COd changes to "On" and the parameters remain locked.
2 to 9999: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen).
- To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been unlocked, return
to "On".
- To lock access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked, enter the new
code.
- To disable locking when the parameters have been unlocked, return to "OFF".
When access is locked using a code, only the monitoring parameters can be accessed, with
only a temporary choice of parameter displayed.
50
Replacing an ATV28 with an ATV31
If necessary, it is easy to replace an ATV28 with a ATV31 in an installation communicating via Modbus.
In fact, most of the variables used in the ATV28 are found in the ATV31 with the same addresses (double addressing).
• To replace an ATV28, the ATV28 addresses in this table can be used, but only these. All the other ATV28 addresses must be
replaced with those for the ATV31.
• For any new installation, we recommend using the new addresses, as this enables the number of Modbus requests to be reduced.
ATV 28 New ATV 28 New ATV 28 New

Code Code Code
address address address address address address
2 3003 COd 266 11412 SP4 462 7201 DP1
4 4434 CrL3 267 11413 SP5 464 7202 DP2
5 4444 CrH3 268 11414 SP6 466 7203 DP3
6 11101 tCC 269 11415 SP7 468 7204 DP4
10 6001 Add 270 11210 IdC 478 5240 IOLR
40 3015 bFr 272 11701 tLS 482 5261 AO1R
51 3102 SFr 279 11941 rPG 487 3208 Otr
52 3103 tFr 280 11942 rIG 491 3211 OPr
53 9602 FrS 281 11903 FbS 530 3231 rtH
55 9601 UnS 282 11001 Ctd 555 3017 INV
60 3107 nrd 283 11002 ttd 600 8606 ERRD
61 9607 UFt 284 11003 Ftd 601 8601 CMDD
64 9003 brA 286 11301 JPF 602 8603 ETAD
65 9011 Frt 287 11940 PIC 603 8602 LFRD
110 5002 r2 340 64001 rOt 604 8605 FRHD
151 9611 OPL 400 8501 CMD 605 8604 RFRD
152 7002 IPL 401 8502 LFR 606 8607 SMIL
155 3110 FLr 402 8504 CMI 607 8608 SMIL
190 7007 drn 440 11920 rPI 608 8609 SMAL
250 3104 HSP 450 3203 FrH 609 8610 SMAL
251 3105 LSP 451 3202 rFr 610 8611 SPAL
252 9001 ACC 453 3204 LCr 611 8612 SPAL
253 9002 dEC 454 3207 ULn 612 8613 SPAT
258 9622 ItH 455 9630 tHr 613 8614 SPDL
260 9012 AC2 456 3209 tHd 614 8615 SPDL
261 9013 dE2 457 7121 LFt 615 8616 SPDT
262 11111 JGF 458 3201 ETA 991 64003 LCC
264 11410 SP2 459 3206 ETI
265 11411 SP3 460 - ETI2 (1)
(1)See the ATV28 communication variables manual.
51
Code index
Code Modbus address CANopen address Name Page

AC2 9012 203C / D 2nd acceleration ramp time 34
ACC 9001 203C / 2 Acceleration ramp time 33
AdC 10401 204A / 2 Automatic standstill DC injection 35
AdCO 6051 201E / 34 CANopen: Drive address 49
Add 6001 201E / 2 Modbus: Drive address 49
AI1C 5242 2016 / 2B Value of analog input AI1 18
AI2C 5243 2016 / 2C Value of analog input AI2 18
AI3C 5244 2016 / 2D Value of analog input AI3 18
AIPC 5241 2016 / 2A Value of analog input AIP (ATV31….A drive potentiometer) 18
AO1R 5261 2016 / 3E Value of the analog output 18
AO1t 4601 2010 / 2 Configuration of the analog output 28
Atr 7122 2029 / 17 Automatic restart 46
bdCO 6053 201E / 36 CANopen: Transmission speed 49
bEn 10003 2046 / 4 Brake engage frequency threshold 42
bEt 10005 2046 / 6 Brake engage time 42
bFr 3015 2000 / 10 Standard motor frequency 25
bIP 10007 2046 / 8 Brake release pulse 42
bLC 10001 2046 / 2 Brake control configuration 42
brA 9003 203C / 4 Deceleration ramp adaptation 34
brL 10002 2046 / 3 Brake release frequency 42
brt 10004 2046 / 5 Brake release time 42
CCS 8421 2036 / 16 Control channel switching 32
Cd1 8423 2036 / 18 Configuration of control channel 1 31
Cd2 8424 2036 / 19 Configuration of control channel 2 31
CHCF 8401 2036 / 2 Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) 31
CHP 8011 2032 / C Switching, motor 2 43
CL2 9203 203E / 4 2nd current limit 43
CLI 9201 203E / 2 Current limit 24
CMD 8501 2037 / 2 Control word 14
CMDD 8601 6040 DRIVECOM control word 11
CMI 8504 2037 / 5 Extended control word 15
CMI1 8541 2037 / 2A Image of Modbus extended control word 20
CMI2 8542 2037 / 2B Image of CANopen extended control word 21
COd 3003 2000 / 4 Display terminal locking code 50
COL 7011 2028 / C Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF 47
COP 8402 2036 / 3 Copy channel 1 to channel 2 32
COS 9606 2042 / 7 Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate 26
COS2 9706 2043 / 7 Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating plate 44
CrH3 4444 200E / 2D Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3 28
CrL3 4434 200E / 23 Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3 28
Ctd 11001 2050 / 2 Motor current threshold 24
dCF 11230 2052 / 1F Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp time for fast stopping 35
dCI 11203 2052 / 4 DC injection via logic input 35
dE2 9013 203C / E 2nd deceleration ramp time 34
dEC 9002 203C / 3 Deceleration ramp time 33
dO 5031 2014 / 20 Analog/logic output AOC/AOV 29
DP1 7201 202A / 2 Past fault No. 1 19
DP2 7202 202A / 3 Past fault No. 2 19
DP3 7203 202A / 4 Past fault No. 3 19
DP4 7204 202A / 5 Past fault No. 4 19
drn 7007 2028 / 8 Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage 48
dSP 11502 2055 / 3 - speed (motorized potentiometer) 39
EP1 7211 202A / C Status of past fault No. 1 20
EP2 7212 202A / D Status of past fault No. 2 20
52
Code index

EP3 7213 202A / E Status of past fault No. 3 20
EP4 7214 202A / F Status of past fault No. 4 20
EPL 7006 2028 / 7 Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF 47
ErCO 6056 201E / 39 CANopen: error word 20
ERRD 8606 603F Fault code 12
ETA 3201 2002 / 2 Status word 16
ETAD 8603 6041 DRIVECOM status word 11
EtF 7131 2029 / 20 External fault 47
ETI 3206 2002 /7 Extended status word 17
FbS 11903 2059 /4 PI feedback multiplication coefficient 40
FCS 8002 2032 /3 Return to factory settings/Restore configuration 28
FLG 9620 2042 / 15 Frequency loop gain 23
FLG2 9720 2043 / 15 Frequency loop gain, motor 2 44
FLO 8431 2036 / 20 Forced local mode 49
FLOC 8432 2036 / 21 Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local mode 49
FLr 3110 2001 /B Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) 46
Fr1 8413 2036 /E Configuration reference 1 30
Fr2 8414 2036 /F Configuration reference 2 30
FrH 3203 2002 / 4 Frequency reference before ramp (absolute value) 16
FRHD 8605 6043 Speed reference (signed ramp input) 12
FrS 9602 2042 / 3 Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate 25
FrS2 9702 2043 / 3 Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on the rating plate 44
Frt 9011 203C / C Ramp switching threshold 34
FSt 11204 2052 / 5 Fast stop via logic input 34
Ftd 11003 2050 / 4 Motor frequency threshold 24
HSP 3104 2001 / 5 High speed 23
Ibr 10006 2046 / 7 Motor current threshold for brake release 42
IdC 11210 2052 / B Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected
35
as stop mode
InH 7125 2029 / 1A Fault inhibit 48
INV 3017 2000 / 12 Nominal drive current 22
IOLR 5240 2016 / 29 Value of logic I/O 18
IPL 7002 2028 /3 Configuration of line phase loss fault 47
ItH 9622 2042 / 17 Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current 23
JF2 11302 2053 /3 2nd skip frequency 24
JGF 11111 2051 /C Jog operation reference 39
JOG 11110 2051 / B Jog operation 39
JPF 11301 2053 / 2 Skip frequency 23
LAC 3006 2000 / 7 Function access level 30
LAF 11601 2056 / 2 Limit, forward direction 45
LAr 11602 2056 / 3 Limit, reverse direction 45
LAS 11603 2056 / 4 Type of limit switch stop 45
LC2 9202 203E / 3 Switching for second current limit 43
LCC 64003 2262 / 4 Control via remote display terminal 32
LCr 3204 2002 / 8 Current in the motor 16
LFD1 8631 2038 / 20 Image of Modbus speed reference 21
LFD2 8632 2038 / 21 Image of CANopen speed reference 21
LFF 7080 2028 / 51 Fallback speed 48
LFL 7003 2028 /4 Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault LFF 48
LFr 8502 2037 /3 Frequency reference via the bus (signed value) 14
LFR1 8521 2037 / 16 Image of Modbus frequency reference 21
LFR2 8522 2037 / 17 Image of CANopen frequency reference 21
LFRD 8602 6042 Speed reference via the bus (signed value) 11
LFt 7121 2029 / 16 Last fault 19
LRS1 3250 2002 / 33 Extended status word No. 1 17
53
Code index

LRS3 3252 2002 / 35 Extended status word No. 3 18
LSP 3105 2001 / 6 Low speed 23
nCr 9603 2042 / 4 Nominal motor current given on the rating plate 25
nCr2 9703 2043 / 4 Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the rating plate 44
NCV 3011 2000 / C Drive rating 22
nrd 3107 2001 / 8 Random switching frequency 27
nSP 9604 2042 / 5 Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate 26
nSP2 9704 2043 /5 Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the rating plate 44
nSt 11202 2052 /3 Freewheel stop via logic input 35
OHL 7008 2028 /9 Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF 47
OLL 7009 2028 /A Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF 47
OPL 9611 2042 /C Configuration of motor phase loss fault 47
OPr 3211 2002 /C Motor power 16
Otr 3205 2002 /6 Motor torque 16
PIC 11940 2059 / 29 Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI regulator 40
PIF 11901 2059 /2 PI regulator feedback 40
PII 11908 2059 /9 Internal PI regulator reference 41
PIR1 8531 2037 / 20 Image of Modbus PI reference 21
PIR2 8532 2037 / 21 Image of CANopen PI reference 21
PISP 8503 2037 /4 PI regulator reference via the bus 14
Pr2 11909 2059 /A 2 preset PI references 40
Pr4 11910 2059 /B 4 preset PI references 41
PS16 11404 2054 /5 16 preset speeds 38
PS2 11401 2054 /2 2 preset speeds 37
PS4 11402 2054 /3 4 preset speeds 37
PS8 11403 2054 /4 8 preset speeds 37
PSt 64002 2262 /3 Stop priority 32
r1 5001 2014 /2 Relay r1 29
r2 5002 2014 /3 Relay r2 29
rFC 8411 2036 /C Reference switching 31
rFr 3202 2002 / 3 Output frequency applied to the motor (signed value) 16
RFRD 8604 6044 Output speed (signed value) 12
rIG 11942 2059 / 2B PI regulator integral gain 40
rOt 64001 2262 / 2 Direction of operation authorized 33
rP2 11921 2059 / 16 2nd preset PI reference 41
rP3 11922 2059 / 17 3rd preset PI reference 41
rP4 11923 2059 / 18 4th preset PI reference 41
rPG 11941 2059 / 2A PI regulator proportional gain 40
rPI 11920 2059 / 15 Internal PI regulator reference 41
rPr 3120 2001 / 15 Operating time reset to zero 48
rPS 9010 203C / B Ramp switching 33
rPt 9004 203C / 5 Type of ramp 33
rrS 11105 2051 / 6 Reverse operation via logic input 28
rSC 9643 2042 / 2C Cold state stator resistance 26
rSF 7124 2029 / 19 Reset of current fault 46
rSL 11960 2059 / 3D Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) 41
rtH 3231 2002 / 20 Operating time 16
SA2 11801 2058 / 2 Summing input 2 36
SA3 11802 2058 / 3 Summing input 3 36
SCS 8001 2032 / 2 Saving the configuration 27
SdC1 10403 204A / 4 Level of automatic standstill DC injection current 36
SdC2 10405 204A / 6 2nd level of standstill DC injection current 36
SdS 12001 205A / 2 USPL/USPH scale factor 25
SFr 3102 2001 / 3 Switching frequency 27
SLL 7010 2028 / B Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF 47
54
Code index

SLP 9625 2042 / 1A Slip compensation 23
SLP2 9725 2043 / 1A Slip compensation, motor 2 45
SMAL 8609 - 8610 6046 / 2 Max. speed 12
SMIL 8607 - 8608 6046 / 1 Min. speed 12
SP10 11418 2054 / 13 10th preset speed 38
SP2 11410 2054 /B 2nd preset speed 38
SP3 11411 2054 /C 3rd preset speed 38
SP4 11412 2054 /D 4th preset speed 38
SP5 11413 2054 /E 5th preset speed 38
SP6 11414 2054 /F 6th preset speed 38
SPAL 8611 - 8612 6048 / 1 Acceleration - Speed delta 12
SPAT 8613 6048 / 2 Acceleration - Time delta 12
SPDL 8614 - 8615 6049 / 1 Deceleration - Speed delta 13
SPDT 8616 6049 / 2 Deceleration - Time delta 13
SrF 9101 203D / 2 Suppression of the speed loop filter 27
StA 9621 2042 / 16 Frequency loop stability 23
StA2 9721 2043 / 16 Frequency loop stability, motor 2 45
StP 7004 2028 / 5 Controlled stop on mains power break 48
Str 11503 2055 / 4 Save reference 40
Stt 11201 2052 / 2 Normal stop mode 34
tA1 9005 203C / 6 Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded 33
tA2 9006 203C / 7 End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded 33
tA3 9007 203C / 8 Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded 33
tA4 9008 203C / 9 End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded 33
tAr 7123 2029 / 18 Max. duration of restart process 46
tbr 6003 201E / 4 Modbus: Transmission speed 49
tCC 11101 2051 / 2 2-wire/3-wire control 28
tCt 11102 2051 / 3 Type of 2-wire control 28
tdC 11211 2052 / C Total DC injection braking time selected as normal stop mode 35
tdC1 10402 204A / 3 Automatic standstill DC injection time 36
tdC2 10404 204A / 5 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time 36
TDM 3210 2002 / B Max. thermal state reached by the drive 16
tFO 6004 201E / 5 Modbus: communication format 49
tFr 3103 2001 / 4 Maximum output frequency 27
tHd 3209 2002 / A Drive thermal state 16
tHr 9630 2042 / 1F Motor thermal state 16
tLS 11701 2057 / 2 Low speed operating time 24
tnL 7012 2028 / D Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF 48
TSP 3401 2004 / 2 Drive firmware type 22
ttd 11002 2050 / 3 Motor thermal state threshold 24
ttO 6005 201E / 6 Modbus: Time-out 49
tUn 9608 2042 / 9 Motor control auto-tuning 26
tUS 9609 2042 / A Auto-tuning status 27
UdP 3302 2000 / 4 Drive firmware version 22
UFr 9623 2042 / 18 IR compensation/Voltage boost 23
UFr2 9723 2043 / 18 IR compensation/Voltage boost, motor 2 44
55
Code index

UFt 9607 2042 / 8 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio 27
UFt2 9707 2043 / 8 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio for motor 2 44
ULn 3207 2002 / 5 Line voltage 16
UnS 9601 2042 / 2 Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate 25
UnS2 9701 2043 / 2 Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the rating plate 43
USP 11501 2055 / 2 + speed (motorized potentiometer) 39
USPH 12003 205A / 4 Motor speed in customer units - High order 17
USPL 12002 205A / 3 Motor speed in customer units - Low order 17
VCAL 3012 2000 / D Drive voltage 22
ZON 3010 2000 / B Drive type 22
56
VVDED303092 EN atv31_communication variables_EN_V1
2003-11
Altivar 31
Programming manual
Contents
Warnings____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 2
Steps for setting up the starter ___________________________________________________________________________________ 3
Factory configuration __________________________________________________________________________________________ 4
Basic functions _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 5
Setup - Preliminary recommendations _____________________________________________________________________________ 7
Functions of the display and the keys______________________________________________________________________________ 8
Remote terminal option________________________________________________________________________________________ 10
Programming _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 11
Function compatibility _________________________________________________________________________________________ 13
List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs _____________________________________________________________ 14
Settings menu SEt-___________________________________________________________________________________________ 16
Motor control menu drC-_______________________________________________________________________________________ 20
I/O menu I-O- _______________________________________________________________________________________________ 23
Control menu CtL- ___________________________________________________________________________________________ 26
Application functions menu FUn- ________________________________________________________________________________ 37
Fault menu FLt- _____________________________________________________________________________________________ 60
Communication menu COM- ___________________________________________________________________________________ 63
Display menu SUP- __________________________________________________________________________________________ 64
Maintenance ________________________________________________________________________________________________ 67
Faults - Causes - Remedies ____________________________________________________________________________________ 68
Configuration/Settings table ____________________________________________________________________________________ 70
Index of parameter codes ______________________________________________________________________________________ 74
Index of functions ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 75
NOTE: Please also refer to the "Installation Guide".
1
Warnings
When the drive is powered up, the power components and some of the control
components are connected to the line supply. It is extremely dangerous to touch
them. The drive cover must be kept closed.
In general, the drive power supply must be disconnected before any operation on
either the electrical or mechanical parts of the installation or machine.
After the ALTIVAR has been switched off and the display has disappeared
completely, wait for 10 minutes before working on the equipment. This is the time
required for the capacitors to discharge.
The motor can be stopped during operation by inhibiting start commands or the
speed reference while the drive remains powered up. If personnel safety requires
prevention of sudden restarts, this electronic locking system is not sufficient: fit
a cut-off on the power circuit.
The drive is fitted with safety devices which, in the event of a fault, can shut down
the drive and consequently the motor. The motor itself may be stopped by a
mechanical blockage. Finally, voltage variations, especially line supply failures,
can also cause shutdowns.
If the cause of the shutdown disappears, there is a risk of restarting which may
endanger certain machines or installations, especially those which must
conform to safety regulations.
In this case the user must take precautions against the possibility of restarts, in
particular by using a low speed detector to cut off power to the drive if the motor
performs an unprogrammed shutdown.
The drive must be installed and set up in accordance with both international and
national standards. Bringing the device into conformity is the responsibility of
the systems integrator who must observe the EMC directive among others within
the European Union.
The specifications contained in this document must be applied in order to
comply with the essential requirements of the EMC directive.
The Altivar 31 must be considered as a component: it is neither a machine nor a

device ready for use in accordance with European directives (machinery
directive and electromagnetic compatibility directive). It is the responsibility of
the end user to ensure that the machine meets these standards.
The drive must not be used as a safety device for machines posing a potential
risk of material damage or personal injury (lifting equipment, for example). In
such applications, overspeed checks and checks to ensure that the trajectory
remains under constant control must be made by separate devices which are
independent of the drive.
The products and equipment described in this document may be changed or

modified at any time, either from a technical point of view or in the way they are
operated. Their description can in no way be considered contractual.
2
Steps for setting up the starter
1 - Delivery of the drive

• Check that the drive reference printed on the label is the same as that on the delivery note corresponding to the purchase order.
• Remove the Altivar 31 from its packaging and check that it has not been damaged in transit.
2 - Check that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range of the drive
(see the ATV 31Installation Manual).
- The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.
3 - Fit the drive

4 - Connect the following to the drive:
• The line supply, ensuring that it is:
- compatible with the voltage range of the drive
- switched off
• The motor, ensuring that its coupling corresponds to the line voltage
• The control via the logic inputs
• The speed reference via the logic or analog inputs
5 - Switch on the drive, but do not give a run command

6 - Configure the following:
The nominal frequency (bFr) of the motor, if it is different from 50 Hz.
7 - Configure the following in the drC- menu:

The motor parameters, only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable.
8 - Configure the following in the I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus:

The application functions (only if the factory configuration of the drive is not suitable), for example the control mode: 3-wire, or 2-wire
transition detection, or 2-wire level detection, or 2-wire level detection with forward direction priority, or local control for ATV31pppA.
The user must ensure that the programmed functions are compatible with the wiring diagram used.
9 - Set the following in the SEt- menu:

- The ACC (Acceleration) and dEC (Deceleration) parameters
- The LSP (Low speed when the reference is zero) and HSP (High speed when the reference is maximum) parameters
- The ItH parameter (Motor thermal protection)
10 - Start the drive
Practical recommendations
• Preparations can be made for programming the drive by filling in the configuration and settings tables (see page 70), in particular when
the factory configuration has to be changed.
• It is always possible to return to the factory settings using the FCS parameter in the drC-, I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus (set InI to activate
the function, see page 22, 25, 36 or 59).
• Auto-tuning, which is performed using the drC- menu, can be applied to optimize performance in terms of accuracy and response time.
Auto-tuning measures the stator resistance of the motor in order to optimize the control algorithms.
3
Factory configuration
Factory settings
The Altivar 31 is factory-set for the most common operating conditions:
• Display: Drive ready (rdY) with motor stopped, and motor frequency with motor running
• Motor frequency (bFr): 50 Hz
• Constant torque application with sensorless flux vector control (UFt = n)
• Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp (Stt = rMP).
• Stop mode in the event of a fault: Freewheel
• Linear ramps (ACC, dEC): 3 seconds
• Low speed (LSP): 0 Hz
• High speed (HSP): 50 Hz
• Motor thermal current (ItH) = nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating)
• Standstill injection braking current (SdC) = 0.7 x nominal drive current, for 0.5 seconds
• Automatic adaptation of the deceleration ramp in the event of overvoltage on braking
• No automatic restarting after a fault
• Switching frequency 4 kHz
• Logic inputs:
- LI1, LI2 (2 directions of operation): 2-wire transition detection control, LI1 = forward, LI2 = reverse, inactive on ATV 31ppppppA drives
(not assigned)
- LI3, LI4: 4 preset speeds (speed 1 = speed reference or LSP, speed 2 = 10 Hz, speed 3 = 15 Hz, speed 4 = 20 Hz).
- LI5 - LI6: Inactive (not assigned)
• Analog inputs:
- AI1: Speed reference 0-10 V, inactive on ATV 31ppppppA (not assigned)
- AI2: Summed speed reference input 0±10 V
- AI3: 4-20 mA inactive (not assigned)
• Relay R1: The contact opens in the event of a fault (or drive off)
• Relay R2: Inactive (not assigned)
• Analog output AOC: 0-20 mA inactive (not assigned)
ATV 31ppppppA range

When they leave the factory, ATV 31ppppppA drives are supplied with local control activated: the RUN, STOP buttons and the drive
potentiometer are active. Logic inputs LI1 and LI2 and analog input AI1 are inactive (not assigned).
If the above values are compatible with the application, the drive can be used without changing the settings.
4
Basic functions
Drive thermal protection

Functions:
Thermal protection by PTC probe fitted on the heatsink or integrated in the power module.
Indirect protection of the drive against overloads by tripping in the event of an overcurrent. Typical tripping points:
- Motor current = 185% of nominal drive current: 2 seconds
- Motor current = 150% of nominal drive current: 60 seconds
Time
(seconds) 5000
3000
1000
200
160
100
60
2
0
1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 Motor current/Drive In
Drive ventilation
The fan starts up when the drive is powered up then shuts down after 10 seconds if a run command has not been received.
The fan is powered automatically when the drive is unlocked (operating direction + reference). It is powered down a few seconds after the
drive is locked (motor speed < 0.2 Hz and injection braking completed).
5
Basic functions
Motor thermal protection

Function:
Thermal protection by calculating the I2t.
The protection takes account of self-cooled motors.
Caution: The memory of the motor thermal state returns to zero when the drive is disconnected.
Trip time t
in seconds
1 Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz
10 Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz
10 000
1 000
100
0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
Motor current/ItH
6
Setup - Preliminary recommendations
Prior to switching on and configuring the drive

- Check that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range of the drive (see pages 3 and 4 of the ATV 31
Installation Manual). The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible.
- Ensure the logic inputs are switched off (state 0) to prevent accidental starting. Otherwise, an input assigned to the
run command may cause the motor to start immediately on exiting the configuration menus.
With power switching via line contactor

- Avoid operating the contactor frequently (premature ageing of the filter capacitors). Use inputs LI1 to LI6 to control
the drive.
- These instructions are vital for cycles < 60 s, otherwise the load resistor may be damaged.
User adjustment and extension of functions

If necessary, the display and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages. It is
very easy to return to the factory settings using the FCS parameter in the drC-, I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus (set InI to activate the function,
see page 22, 25, 36 or 59).
There are three types of parameter:
- Display: Values displayed by the drive
- Setting: Can be changed during operation or when stopped
- Configuration: Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place. Can be displayed during operation.
- Check that changes to the current operating settings do not present any danger. Changes should preferably be made
with the drive stopped.
Start up
Important: In factory settings mode on power-up, or in a manual fault reset or after a stop command, the motor can only be powered once
the "forward", "reverse" and "DC injection stop" commands have been reset. If they have not been reset, the drive will display "nSt" but will
not start. If the automatic restart function is configured (parameter Atr in the FLt- menu, see page 60), these commands are taken into
account without a reset being necessary.
Test on a low power motor or without a motor

• In factory settings mode, "motor phase loss" detection is active (OPL = YES). To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment
without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of high power drives), deactivate
"motor phase loss" detection (OPL = NO).
• Configure the voltage/frequency ratio: UFt = L (drC- menu on page 21)
• Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current.
Using motors in parallel

• Configure the voltage/frequency ratio: UFt = L (drC- menu on page 21)
• Motor thermal protection is no longer provided by the drive. Provide an alternative means of thermal protection on every motor.
7
Functions of the display and the keys
• Red LED Altivar 31

"DC bus ON" RUN
CAN • 2 CANopen status LEDs

• Four 7-segment displays
ERR
• Returns to the previous ESC • Exits a menu or parameter, or

menu or parameter, or clears the displayed value to
increases the displayed return to the previous stored
value value
ENT
• Goes to the next menu or • Enters a menu or a parameter,
parameter, or decreases or saves the displayed
the displayed value parameter or value
• Pressing or does not store the selection.
• Press and hold down (>2 s) or to scroll through the data quickly.
To save and store the selection: ENT
The display flashes when a value is stored.
Normal display, with no fault present and no starting:
- 43.0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP- menu (default selection: motor frequency).
In current limit mode, the display flashes.
- init: Initialization sequence
- rdY: Drive ready
- dcb: DC injection braking in progress
- nSt: Freewheel stop
- FSt: Fast stop
- tUn: Auto-tuning in progress
The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault.
8
Functions of the display and the keys
ATV31ppppppA:
• Red LED
"DC bus ON" Altivar 31
RUN
• Four 7-segment displays CAN • 2 CANopen status LEDs
ERR
• Exits a menu or a parameter,
• Returns to the previous menu or or clears the displayed value to return
parameter, or increases the to the previous stored value
ESC
displayed value
• Goes to the next menu or

parameter, or decreases the • Enters a menu or a parameter, or
ENT
displayed value saves the displayed parameter or
value
STOP STOP/RESET button

RUN • Used to reset faults
• Reference potentiometer, RESET
active if the Fr1 parameter in the • Can be used to control motor stopping
CtL- menu is configured as AIP - If tCC (I-O- menu) is not configured
as LOC, it is a freewheel stop.
- If tCC (I-O- menu) is configured as
• RUN button: Controls motor LOC, stopping is on a ramp, but if
switch-on in forward mode, if injection braking is in progress, a
parameter tCC in the I-O- menu is freewheel stop takes place.
configured as LOC
• Pressing or does not store the selection.
• Press and hold down (>2 s) or to scroll through the data quickly.
To save and store the selection: ENT
Normal display, with no fault present and no starting:

- 43.0: Display of the parameter selected in the SUP- menu (default selection: output frequency applied to the motor).
In current limit mode, the display flashes.
- init: Initialization sequence
- rdY: Drive ready
- dcb: DC injection braking in progress
- nSt: Freewheel stop
- FSt: Fast stop
- tUn: Auto-tuning in progress
The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault.
9
Remote terminal option
This module is a local control unit which can be mounted on the door of the wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure. It has a cable with
connectors, which is connected to the drive serial link (see the manual supplied with the terminal). It has the same display and the same
programming buttons as the Altivar 31 with the addition of a switch to lock access to the menus and three buttons for controlling the drive:
• FWD/REV: reversal of the direction of rotation
• RUN: motor run command
• STOP/RESET: Motor stop command or fault reset
Pressing the button a first time stops the motor, and if DC injection standstill braking is configured, pressing it a second time stops this
braking.
View of the front panel: View of the rear panel:
4-character
display unit
ESC
ENT Connector
FWD STOP
REV RUN RESET
Access locking switch:
• positions: settings and display accessible

(SEt- and SUP- menus)
• position: all menus can be accessed
Note: Customer password protection has priority on the switch.
• The access locking switch on the remote terminal also prevents the drive settings being accessed via the keypad.
• When the remote terminal is disconnected, if the drive has been locked, the keypad will remain locked.
• In order for the remote terminal to be active, the tbr parameter in the COM- menu must remain in factory settings mode: 19.2
(see page 73).
Saving and loading configurations

Up to four complete configurations for ATV 31 drives can be stored on the remote terminal. These configurations can be saved, transported
and transferred from one drive to another of the same rating. 4 different operations for the same device can also be stored on the terminal.
See the SCS and FCS parameters in the drC-, I-O-, CtL- and FUn- menus.
10
Programming
Access to menus
Power-up
XXX Displays the drive status
ESC
ENT
bFr Motor frequency (the factory setting is only visible

the first time the drive is powered up)
ENT
ENT
ESC
SEt- ESC
Settings
ENT
ESC
drC- ESC
Motor control
ENT
ESC
I-O- ESC
I/O
ENT
ESC
CtL- ESC
Control
Menus
ENT
ESC
FUn- ESC
Functions
ENT
ESC
FLt- ESC
Faults
ENT
ESC
CON- ESC
Communication
ENT
ESC
SUP- ESC
Monitoring
Some parameters can be accessed in a number of menus for increased user-friendliness:

- Entering settings
- Return to factory settings
- Restoring and saving the configuration
A dash appears after menu and sub-menu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes.
Examples: FUn- menu, ACC parameter.
11
Programming
Accessing menu parameters

ENT
To save and store the selection:

Example:
Menu Parameter Value or assignment
SEt- ACC 15 0
ENT ENT
. 1 flash
(save)
ESC
ESC ESC
dEC 26 0
.
ENT
26 0.
(Next parameter)
All the menus are "drop-down" type menus, which means that after the last parameter, if you continue to press , you will return to the
first parameter and, conversely, you can switch from the first parameter to the last parameter by pressing .
ENT
Menu 1st
ESC
nth
last
If, after modifying any of the parameters (nth), you quit a menu and return to this menu without having accessed another menu in the
meantime, you will be taken directly to the nth parameter (see below). If, in the meantime, you have accessed another menu or have
restarted the system, you will always be taken to the first parameter in the menu (see above).
1st
ENT
Menu nth
ESC
last
Configuration of the bFr parameter

This parameter can only be modified in stop mode without a run command.
>.H
Code Description Adjustment Factory setting
range
bFr Standard motor frequency 50
This parameter is only visible the first time the drive is switched on.
It can be modified at any time in the drC- menu.
50 Hz: IEC
60 Hz: NEMA
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 16, Ftd page 19, FrS page 20 and tFr page
22.
12
Function compatibility
Incompatible functions
The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below:
Automatic restart
Flying restart
This function is locked if automatic standstill injection is configured as DC (AdC = Ct).
Reverse
On the ATV31pppA range only, this function is locked if local control is active (tCC = LOC).

The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one
another. Functions which are not listed in this table are fully compatible.
If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will prevent the remainder being configured.
Management of limit switches
DC injection stop
Brake sequence
Summing inputs
Freewheel stop
Preset speeds
Jog operation
+/- speed (1)
PI regulator
Fast stop
Summing inputs p A p A
+/- speed (1) p p p p
Management of limit switches p
Preset speeds X p p A
PI regulator p p p p p p
Jog operation X p X p p
Brake sequence p p p
DC injection stop p A
Fast stop A
Freewheel stop X X
(1) Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 (see diagrams 28 and 30)
p Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable
Priority functions (functions which cannot be active simultaneously):

X A The
function indicated by the arrow has priority over the
other.

Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.
Logic and analog input application functions

Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs.
A single input can activate several functions at the same time (reverse and 2nd ramp for example). The user must therefore ensure that
these functions are compatible.
The SUP- display menu (parameters LIA and AIA on page 66) can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check
their compatibility.
13
List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs
Logic inputs Page Code Factory setting

ATV31ppp ATV31pppA
Not assigned - - LI5 - LI6 LI1 - LI2
LI5 - LI6
Forward - - LI1
2 preset speeds 44 PS2 LI3 LI3
4 preset speeds 44 PS4 LI4 LI4
8 preset speeds 44 PS8
16 preset speeds 45 PS16
2 preset PI references 51 Pr2
4 preset PI references 51 Pr4
+ speed 48 USP
- speed 48 dSP
Jog operation 46 JOG
Ramp switching 38 rPS
Switching for 2nd current limit 55 LC2
Fast stop via logic input 39 FSt
DC injection via logic input 39 dCI
Freewheel stop via logic input 40 nSt
Reverse 23 rrS LI2
External fault 61 EtF
RESET (fault reset) 60 rSF
Forced local mode 63 FLO
Reference switching 34 rFC
Control channel switching 35 CCS
Motor switching 56 CHP
Limiting of forward motion (limit switch) 58 LAF
Limiting of reverse motion (limit switch) 58 LAr
Fault inhibit 62 InH
Analog inputs Page Code Factory setting

ATV31ppp ATV31pppA
Not assigned - - AI3 AI1 - AI3
Reference 1 33 Fr1 AI1 AIP
(potentiometer)
Reference 2 33 Fr2
Summing input 2 42 SA2 AI2 AI2
Summing input 3 42 SA3
PI regulator feedback 51 PIF
Analog/logic output Page Code Factory setting

Not assigned - - AOC/AOV
Motor current 24 OCr
Motor frequency 24 rFr
Motor torque 24 OLO
Power supplied by the drive 24 OPr
Drive fault (logic data) 24 FLt
Drive running (logic data) 24 rUn
Frequency threshold reached (logic data) 24 FtA
High speed (HSP) reached (logic data) 24 FLA
Current threshold reached (logic data) 24 CtA
Frequency reference reached (logic data) 24 SrA
Motor thermal threshold reached (logic data) 24 tSA
Brake sequence (logic data) 54 bLC
14
List of functions which can be assigned to inputs/outputs
Relay Page Code Factory setting

Not assigned - - R2
Drive fault 24 FLt R1
Drive running 24 rUn
Frequency threshold reached 24 FtA
High speed (HSP) reached 24 FLA
Current threshold reached 24 CtA
Frequency reference reached 24 SrA
Motor thermal threshold reached 24 tSA
Brake sequence 54 bLC
15
Settings menu SEt-
ENT ENT
SEt- LFr Speed reference via the terminal

ESC ESC
ENT
ESC
rPI
ESC
ENT
ACC
ESC
ESC
ESC ENT
SdS Spd parameter scale factor

ESC
The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
Check that it is safe to make changes during operation. Changes should preferably be made in stop mode.
These parameter appear regardless of how the other menus have been configured.
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the corresponding
function is also accessible and adjustable from within the configuration menu, to aid programming their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated.
SEt-
range
LFr Speed reference via the remote terminal 0 to HSP
This parameter appears if LCC = YES (page 35) or if Fr1/Fr2 = LCC (page 33), and if the remote terminal is
online. In this case, LFr can also be accessed via the drive keypad.
LFr is reset to 0 when the drive is powered down.
rPI Internal PI regulator reference See page 51 0.0 to 100% 0
ACC Acceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s
Defined as the acceleration time between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC- menu).
AC2 2nd acceleration ramp time See page 38 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s
dE2 2nd deceleration ramp time See page 38 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s
dEC Deceleration ramp time 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s
Defined as the deceleration time between the nominal frequency FrS (parameter in the drC- menu) and 0.
tA1 Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to 100 10%
as % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2)
tA2 End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to (100-tA1) 10%
tA3 Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to 100 10%
as % of total ramp time (dEC or dE2)
tA4 End of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded See page 37 0 to (100-tA3) 10%
LSP Low speed 0 to HSP 0 Hz
(Motor frequency at min. reference)
HSP High speed LSP to tFr bFr
(Motor frequency to max. reference): Check that this setting is suitable for the motor and the application.
ItH Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current 0.2 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive
rating
Set ItH to the nominal current on the motor rating plate.
Please refer to OLL on page 61 if you wish to suppress thermal protection.
(1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.
16
Settings menu SEt-
SEt-
range
UFr IR compensation/voltage boost 0 to 100% 20
- For UFt (page 21) = n or nLd: IR compensation
- For UFt = L or P: Voltage boost
Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the value of UFr is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability).
Modifying UFt (page 21) will cause UFr to return to the factory setting (20%).
FLG Frequency loop gain 1 to 100% 20
Parameter can only be accessed if UFt (page 21) = n or nLd.
The FLG parameter adjusts the drive’s ability to follow the speed ramp based on the inertia of the machine
being driven.
Hz FLG low Hz FLG correct Hz FLG high
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 In this case, 30 30 In this case,
20 increase FLG 20 20 reduce FLG
10 10 10
0 0 0
-10 -10 -10
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
StA Frequency loop stability 1 to 100% 20

Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or deceleration), according to
the dynamics of the machine.
Hz StA low Hz StA correct Hz StA high
50 50 50
40 40 40
In this case, In this case,
30 30 30
increase StA reduce StA
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
-10 -10 -10
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
SLP Slip compensation 0 to 150% 100

• If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
• If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
IdC Level of DC injection braking current activated See page 39 0 to In (1) 0.7 In (1)
via logic input or selected as stop mode (2).
tdC Total DC injection braking time selected as stop See page 39 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
mode (2).
tdC1 Automatic standstill DC injection time See page 41 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
SdC1 Level of automatic standstill DC injection current See page 41 0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.7 In (1)
tdC2 2nd automatic standstill DC injection time See page 41 0 to 30 s 0s
SdC2 2nd level of standstill DC injection current See page 41 0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.5 In (1)
(2) Caution: These settings are not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function.
Those which are underlined appear in factory settings mode.
17
Settings menu SEt-
SEt-
range
JPF Skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz
Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JPF. This function prevents a critical
speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF2 2nd skip frequency 0 to 500 0 Hz
Prevents prolonged operation at a frequency range of ± 1 Hz around JF2. This function prevents a critical
speed which leads to resonance. Setting the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JGF Jog operating frequency See page 46 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
rPG PI regulator proportional gain See page 51 0.01 to 100 1
rIG PI regulator integral gain See page 51 0.01 to 100/s 1/s
FbS PI feedback multiplication coefficient See page 51 0.1 to 100 1
PIC Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI See page 51 nO - YES nO
regulator
rP2 2nd preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 30%
rP3 3rd preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 60%
rP4 4th preset PI reference See page 51 0 to 100% 90%
SP2 2nd preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz
SP3 3rd preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 15 Hz
SP4 4th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 20 Hz
SP6 th
6 preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 30 Hz
SP11 11th preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 55 HZ
SP14 th
14 preset speed See page 45 0 to 500 Hz 80 Hz
CLI Current limit 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1)
CL2 2nd current limit See page 55 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1)
tLS Low speed operating time 0 to 999.9 s 0 (no time limit)
Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor restarts
if the frequency reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present.
Caution: Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited time
rSL Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) See page 52 0 to 100% 0
UFr2 IR compensation, motor 2 See page 57 0 to 100% 20
FLG2 Frequency loop gain, motor 2 See page 57 1 to 100% 20
StA2 Stability, motor 2 See page 57 1 to 100% 20
SLP2 Slip compensation, motor 2 See page 57 0 to 150% 100%
18
Settings menu SEt-
SEt-
range
Ftd Motor frequency threshold above which the relay contact 0 to 500 Hz bFr
(R1 or R2 = FtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = StA)
ttd Motor thermal state threshold above which the relay contact (R1 0 to 118% 100%
or R2 = tSA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = tSA)
Ctd Motor current threshold beyond which the relay contact 0 to 1.5 In (1) In (1)
(R1 or R2 = CtA) closes or output AOV = 10 V (dO = CtA)
SdS Scale factor for display parameter SPd1/SPd2/SPd3 (SUP- 0.1 to 200 30
menu on page 65)
Used to scale a value in proportion to the output frequency rFr: the machine speed, the motor speed, etc.
- If SdS y 1, SPd1 is displayed (possible definition = 0.01)
- If 1 < SdS y 10, SPd2 is displayed (possible definition = 0.1)
- If SdS > 10, SPd3 is displayed (possible definition = 1)
- If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 9999:
SdS x rFr
Display of Spd3 = to 2 decimal places
1000
Example: For 24 223, display is 24.22
- If SdS > 10 and SdS x rFr > 65535, display locked at 65.54
Example: Display motor speed for

4-pole motor, 1500 rpm at 50 Hz (synchronous speed):
SdS = 30
SPd3 = 1500 at rFr = 50 Hz
SFr Switching frequency See page 22 2.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz
This parameter can also be accessed in the drC- menu.
19
Motor control menu drC-
ENT
bFr
ESC
Standard motor frequency
drC- ESC ENT
tAI
ESC
FCS
ESC ESC
Return to factory settings/restore configuration
ENT
With the exception of tUn, which can power up the motor, parameters can only be modified in stop mode, with no run command
present.
On the optional remote terminal, this menu can be accessed with the switch in the position.
Drive performance can be optimized by:

- Entering the values given on the motor rating plate in the drive menu
- Performing an auto-tune operation (on a standard asynchronous motor)
drC-
range
bFr Standard motor frequency 50
50 Hz: IEC
60 Hz: NEMA
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: HSP page 16, Ftd page 19, FrS page 20 and
tFr page 22.
UnS Nominal motor voltage given on the rating plate According to drive According to drive
rating rating
ATV31pppM2: 100 to 240 V
ATV31pppM3X: 100 to 240 V
ATV31pppN4: 100 to 500 V
ATV31pppS6X: 100 to 600 V
FrS Nominal motor frequency given on the rating plate 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz
UnS (in volts)
FrS (in Hz)
ATV31pppM2: 7 max.
ATV31pppM3X: 7 max.
ATV31pppN4: 14 max.
ATV31pppS6X: 17 max.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz.
nCr Nominal motor current given on the rating plate 0.25 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive
rating
nSP Nominal motor speed given on the rating plate 0 to 32760 RPM According to drive
rating
If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as
a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows:
100 - slip as a %
• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
100
or
50 - slip in Hz
• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
50
or
60 - slip in Hz
60
COS Motor Cos Phi given on the rating plate 0.5 to 1 According to drive
rating
20
drC-
range
rSC Cold state stator resistance nO
nO: Function inactive. For applications which do not require high performance or do not tolerate automatic
autotuning (passing a current through the motor) each time the drive is powered up.
InIt: Activates the function. To improve low-speed performance whatever the thermal state of the motor.
XXXX: Value of cold state stator resistance used, in mΩ.
Caution:
• It is strongly recommended that this function is activated in Lifting and Handling applications.
• The function should only be activated (InIt) when the motor is in cold state.
• When rSC = InIt, parameter tUn is forced to POn. At the next run command, the stator resistance is
measured with an auto-tune. Parameter rSC then changes to this value (XXXX) and maintains it; tUn
remains forced to POn. Parameter rSC remains at InIt as long as the measurement has not been performed.
• Value XXXX can be forced or modified using the keys.
tUn Motor control auto-tuning nO
It is essential that all the motor parameters (UnS, FrS, nCr, nSP, COS) are configured correctly before
performing auto-tuning.
nO: Auto-tuning not performed.
YES: Auto-tuning is performed as soon as possible, then the parameter automatically switches to dOnE
or nO in the event of a fault (the tnF fault is displayed if tnL = YES (see page 62).
dOnE: Use of the values given the last time auto-tuning was performed.
rUn: Auto-tuning is performed every time a run command is sent.
POn: Auto-tuning is performed on every power-up.
LI1 to LI6: Auto-tuning is performed on the transition from 0 V 1 of a logic input assigned to this function.
Caution:
tUn is forced to POn if rSC is other than nO.
Auto-tuning is only performed if no command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function
is assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt; wait for the display to change to "dOnE" or "nO".
During auto-tuning the motor operates at nominal current.

tUS Auto-tuning status tAb
(information only, cannot be modified)
tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress
FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed.
dOnE: The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor.
Strd: The cold state stator resistance (rSC other than nO) that is used to control the motor.
UFt Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio n
L: Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors
P: Variable torque: pump and fan applications
n: Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications
nLd: Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics (behaves in a similar way
to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load)
Voltage
UnS
L
n
P
Frequency
FrS
21
drC-
range
nrd Random switching frequency YES
YES: Frequency with random modulation
nO: Fixed frequency
Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency.
SFr Switching frequency 2.0 to 16 kHz 4 kHz
(1)
The frequency can be adjusted to reduce the noise generated by the motor.
If the frequency has been set to a value higher than 4 kHz, in the event of an excessive rise in temperature,
the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and increase it again once the temperature has
returned to normal.
tFr Maximum output frequency 10 to 500 Hz 60 Hz
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz.
SrF Suppression of the speed loop filter nO
nO: The speed loop filter is active (prevents the reference being exceeded).
YES: The speed loop filter is suppressed (in position control applications, this reduces the response time
and the reference may be exceeded).

SCS Saving the configuration nO

(1)
nO: Function inactive
StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS automatically
switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is used to keep another configuration
in reserve, in addition to the current configuration.
When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both initialized with
the factory configuration.
• If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options will
appear: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 (files available in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory
for saving the current configuration). They can be used to store between 1 and 4 different configurations
which can also be stored on or even transferred to other drives of the same rating.
FCS Return to factory settings/restore configuration nO
(1)
rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by
SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon
as this action has been performed.
InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically changes to
nO as soon as this action has been performed.
• If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection options appear,
as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4
files): FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4. They enable the current configuration to be replaced with one
of the 4 configurations which may be loaded on the remote terminal.
Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that
the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example).
If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that a
configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory settings must be restored using InI.
In both cases, check the configuration to be transferred before trying again.
For rECI, InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account, the ENT key must be held down for 2 s.
(1) SCS and FCS can be accessed via several configuration menus but they concern all menus and parameters as a whole.
(2) Parameter can also be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-).
22
I/O menu I-O-
ENT
tCC
ESC
2-wire/3-wire control
I-O- ESC ENT
ESC
FCS
ESC ESC
ENT
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present.
I-O-
Code Description Factory setting
tCC 2-wire/3-wire control 2C
(Type of control) ATV31pppA: LOC
Control configuration:
2C = 2-wire control
3C = 3-wire control
LOC = local control (drive RUN/STOP/RESET) for ATV31pppA only (invisible if LAC = L3, see page 33).
2-wire control: The open or closed state of the input controls running or stopping.
ATV 31
Wiring example: 24 V LI1 LIx
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
3-wire control (pulse control): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to control starting, a "stop" pulse is
sufficient to control stopping.
Example of wiring: ATV 31
LI1: stop 24 V LI1 LI2 LIx
LI2: forward
LIx: reverse
To change the assignment of tCC press the "ENT" key for 2 s. This causes the following functions
to return to their factory setting: rrS, tCt and all functions affecting logic inputs.
tCt Type of 2-wire control (parameter only accessible if tCC = 2C) trn
LEL: State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop.
trn: A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to prevent accidental
restarts after a break in the power supply.
PFO: State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the "forward" input always takes priority over
the "reverse" input.
rrS Reverse operation via logic input if tCC = 2C: LI2
if tCC = 3C: LI3
if tCC = LOC: nO
If rrS = nO, reverse operation is active, by means of negative voltage on AI2 for example.
nO: Not assigned
LI2: Logic input LI2, can be accessed if tCC = 2C
LI3: Logic input LI3
23
I/O menu I-O-
I-O-
CrL3 Value for low speed (LSP) on input AI3, can be set between 0 and 20 mA 4 mA
CrH3 Value for high speed (HSP) on input AI3, can be set between 4 and 20 mA 20 mA
These two parameters are used to configure the input for 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-4 mA, etc.
Frequency Frequency
HSP Example: HSP
20 - 4 mA
LSP LSP
0 0
AI 3 CrH3 CrL3 AI 3
CrL3 CrH3 20 (mA)
(mA) (4 mA) (20 mA)
AO1t Configuration of the analog output 0A

0A: 0 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC)
4A: 4 - 20 mA configuration (use terminal AOC)
10U: 0 - 10 V configuration (use terminal AOV)
dO Analog/logic output AOC/AOV nO
nO: Not assigned
OCr: Motor current. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive current.
OFr: Motor frequency. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to the maximum frequency tFr (page 22).
Otr: Motor torque. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal motor torque.
OPr: Power supplied by the drive. 20 mA or 10 V corresponds to twice the nominal drive power.
Making the following assignments (1) will transform the analog output to a logic output (see the diagram in
the Installation Manual):
FLt: Drive fault
rUn: Drive running
FtA: Frequency threshold reached (Ftd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19)
FLA: High speed (HSP) reached
CtA: Current threshold reached (Ctd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19)
SrA: Frequency reference reached
tSA: Motor thermal threshold reached (ttd parameter in the SEt- menu, page 19)
bLC: Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated from the
FUn- menu, see page 54)
APL: Loss of 4-20 mA signal, even if LFL = nO (page 62)
The logic output is in state 1 (24 V) when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (state 1
if the drive is not faulty).
(1) With these assignments, configure AOt = 0A.

r1 Relay r1 FLt
nO: Not assigned
FLt: Drive fault
rUn: Drive running
The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (powered up if
the drive is not faulty).
r2 Relay r2 nO
nO: Not assigned
FLt: Drive fault
rUn: Drive running
bLC: Brake sequence (for information, as this assignment can be only be activated or deactivated from the
FUn- menu, see page 54)
The relay is powered up when the selected assignment is active, with the exception of FLt (powered up if
the drive is not faulty).
24
I/O menu I-O-
I-O-
SCS Saving the configuration
(1)
FCS Return to factory settings/restore configuration
(1)
rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by
SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon
as this action has been performed.
of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal.
Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO, this means that the
configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). If
ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that a
25
Control menu CtL-
ENT
LAC
ESC
Function access level
CtL- ESC ENT
Fr1
ESC
FCS
ESC ESC
ENT
Control and reference channels

Run commands (forward, reverse, etc.) and references can be sent using the following methods:
Command CMD Reference rFr

tEr: Terminal (LI.) AI1-AI2-AI3: Terminal
LOC: Keypad (RUN/STOP) on ATV31pppA only AIP: Potentiometer on ATV31pppA only
LCC: Remote terminal (RJ45 socket) LCC: ATV31 keypad or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal
Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket) Mdb: Modbus (RJ45 socket)
CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket) CAn: CANopen (RJ45 socket)
Note:
The STOP keys on the keypad and the remote terminal may retain priority (PSt parameter in the CtL- menu).
The LAC parameter in the CtL- menu can be used to select priority modes for the control and reference channels. It has 3 function levels:
• LAC = L1: Basic functions, with priority via communication bus. This level is interchangeable with ATV28.
• LAC = L2: Provides the option of additional functions compared with L1:
- Brake control
- Switching for 2nd current limit
- Motor switching
• LAC = L3: Same options as with L2, plus mixed mode for control and reference channels.
These channels can be combined as follows if parameter LAC = L1 or L2.

Highest priority to lowest priority: Local forcing, CANopen, Modbus, Remote terminal, Terminal/Keypad (from right to left in the diagram
below).
Terminal/Keypad
Modbus
LCC CANopen
FLO
Remote terminal
Forced local mode
See the detailed diagrams on pages 28 and 29.
• On ATV31 drives, in factory settings mode, control and reference are managed by the terminal.
• On ATV31pppA drives, in factory settings mode, control is via the keypad and the reference is set via the potentiometer for this keypad.
• With a remote terminal, if LCC = YES (CtL- menu), control and reference are managed by the remote terminal (reference via LFr, SEt-
menu).
26
Control menu CtL-
These channels can be combined in other ways described below if LAC = L3.
Combined control and reference (parameter CHCF = SIM):

Selection of reference
channel: parameter Fr1
The control channel is
connected to the same Control and reference
source.
Selection of reference H.+

The control channel is
connected to the same
source.
Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either.
See the detailed diagrams on pages 30 et 32.
Separate control and reference (parameter CHCF = SEP):

Reference
Reference
H.+
Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either.
Control
Selection of control
channel: parameter Cdl
Control
Selection of control ++5

channel: parameter Cd2
Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control word bit for remote switching of either.
See the detailed diagrams on pages 30 and 31.
27
Control menu CtL-
Reference channel for LAC = L1 or L2

Fr1
+
speed
UPdt Note: If the +/- speed command is
UPdH - configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH),
speed
summing inputs SA2/SA3 are not active.
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
LFr
Preset speeds Remote
nO terminal
SA2
(SP1)
nO SP2
AI1 LI
AI2 SP16
Jog
AI3 operation
AIP LI
SA3 PI not assigned PIF

nO
nO
PI assigned
AI1
Channel 1
AI2
AI3 PIF ) Ramps
YES
PI function
AIP nO see page 49 HSP ACC DEC
AI1 nO .H0 H.H
nO nO
AI2
LCC LSP AC2 DE2
AI3
rFC FLO
Modbus
Fr2
Channel 2
Forced local mode

CANopen
+
speed
UPdt * "Modbus" or "CANopen" is selected online by
UPdH - writing the appropriate control word (see the bus-
speed
specific documentation).
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
AIP
Key:
Parameter: Function accessible for LAC = L2

The black square represents
the factory setting assignment
28
Control menu CtL-
Control channel for LAC = L1 or L2

Parameters FLO, LCC and the selection of the Modbus or CANopen bus are common to the reference and control channels.
Example: LCC = YES sets the drive to control and reference via the remote terminal.
tCC
LCC

FLO

Forward
CMD Reverse
STOP

ATV31pppA Remote
keypad terminal ATV31pppA keypad

PSt
(STOP
priority)
Remote terminal
Key:
Parameter:
29
Control menu CtL-
Reference channel for LAC = L3

Fr1
+ Note: If the +/- speed command is configured (Fr1 = UPdt or UPdH), summing inputs
speed SA2/SA3 are not active.
UPdt
-
UPdH
speed
FLOC
AI1
AI1
AI2
AI2
AI3
LFr AIP
Preset speeds
LFr
AI3
AIP
LCC nO
LCC
Mdb
Remote (SP1)
terminal CAn Remote

SP2 terminal
LI
SA2 SP16
Jog
nO
operation
LI
AI1
PIF
Mdb
AI2 PI not assigned
CAn
nO
LFr
AI3
AIP
PI assigned
LCC
Mdb
Ramps
Channel 1
Remote LI
CAn
terminal
HSP ACC DEC
.H0 H.H
SA3 nO
nO
LSP AC2 DE2

Channel 2
nO FLO
AI1 rFC Forced local mode
AI2
LFr AI3
AIP
PIF )
LCC PI function
nO
Mdb see page 49
Remote AI1
terminal CAn
AI2
Fr2 AI3
+
UPdt
speed
*
-
UPdH
speed
nO
AI1
Key:
AI2
LFr
AI3
AIP
Parameter:
LCC the factory setting assignment
Mdb
Remote CAn
terminal
30
Control menu CtL-
Control channel for LAC = L3

Combined reference and control
Parameters Fr1, Fr2, rFC, FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control. The control channel is therefore determined by the
reference channel.
Example: If reference Fr1 = AI1 (analog input on terminal block) control is via LI (logic input on terminal block)..
Fr1 FLOC

ATV31pppA keypad

ATV31pppA keypad

Remote terminal

Remote terminal
FLO Forced local
CHCF mode
rFC

Forward
ATV31pppA keypad Reverse
STOP

Fr2
PSt

(STOP has
Remote terminal priority)

ATV31pppA keypad

Remote terminal
Key:
Parameter:
31
Control menu CtL-
Control channel for LAC = L3

Mixed mode (separate reference and control)
Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and control.
Example: If the reference is in local forced mode via AI1 (analog input on terminal block) control in local forced mode is via LI (logic input
on terminal block).
Cd1 FLOC

Keypad
ATV31pppA keypad ATV31pppA

Remote terminal

Remote
terminal

CCS FLO Forced local

CHCF

Forward

ATV31pppA keypad Reverse

STOP

Cd2
PSt
(STOP has
Remote terminal priority)
ATV31pppA keypad

Remote terminal

Key:
Parameter:
32
Control menu CtL-
There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table 13). In this case, the first function configured will
prevent the remainder being configured.
CtL-
range
LAC Function access level L1
L1: Access to standard functions. Significantly, this level is interchangeable with ATV28.
L2: Access to advanced functions in the FUn- menu:
- Brake control
- Switching for second current limit
- Motor switching
L3: Access to advanced functions and management of mixed control modes.
Assigning LAC to L3 will restore the factory settings of the Fr1 (below), Cd1 (page 34),
CHCF (page 34), and tCC (page 23) parameters. The latter is forced to "2C" on ATV31pppA.
L3 can only be restored to L2 or L1 and L2 to L1 by means of a "factory setting" via FCS
(page 36).
In order to change the assignment of LAC, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds.
Fr1 Configuration reference 1 AI1
AIP for
ATV31pppA
AI1: Analog input AI1
AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only)
UPdt: (1) + speed/- speed via LI

UpdH: (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal. For
r
operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 65)
LCC: Reference via the remote terminal, LFr parameter in the SEt- menu page 16.
Ndb: Reference via Modbus
CAn: Reference via CANopen
Fr2 Configuration reference 2 nO
nO: Not assigned
AIP: Potentiometer (ATV31pppA only)
UPdt: (1) + speed/- speed via LI

UpdH: (1) + speed/- speed via keys r on the ATV31 or ATV31pppA keypad or remote terminal. For
r
operation, display the frequency rFr (see page 65)
(1) Caution: You cannot assign UPdt to Fr1 or Fr2 and UPdH to Fr1 or Fr2 at the same time. Only one of the UPdt/UPdH assignments is
permitted on each reference channel.
33
Control menu CtL-
CtL-
range
rFC Reference switching Fr1
Parameter rFC can be used to select channel Fr1 or Fr2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for
remote switching of Fr1 or Fr2.
Fr1: Reference = Reference 1
Fr2: Reference = Reference 2
C111: Bit 11 of the Modbus control word

C211: Bit 11 of the CANopen control word
The reference can be switched with the drive running.

Fr1 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0.
Fr2 is active when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1.
CHCF Mixed mode (control channels separated from reference channels) SIM
Can be accessed if LAC = L3
SIN: Combined
SEP: Separate
Cd1 Configuration of control channel 1 tEr
LOC for
ATV31pppA
Can be accessed if CHCF = SEP and LAC = L3
tEr: Terminal block control
LOC: Keypad control (ATV31pppA only)
LCC: Remote terminal control
Ndb: Control via Modbus
CAn: Control via CAN
Cd2 Configuration of control channel 2 Mdb:
tEr: Terminal block control
LOC: Keypad control (ATV31pppA only)
LCC: Remote terminal control
Ndb: Control via Modbus
CAn: Control via CAN
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled.
34
Control menu CtL-
CtL-
range
CCS Control channel switching Cd1
Parameter CCS can be used to select channel Cd1 or Cd2 or to configure a logic input or a control bit for
remote switching of Cd1 or Cd2.
Cd1: Control channel = Channel 1
Cd2: Control channel = Channel 2
Channel 1 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 0.

Channel 2 is active when the input or control word bit is in state 1.
COp Copy channel 1 to channel 2 nO
(copy only in this direction)
Can be accessed if LAC = L3
nO: No copy
SP: Copy reference
Cd: Copy control
ALL: Copy control and reference
• If channel 2 is controlled via the terminal block, channel 1 control is not copied.
• If channel 2 reference is set via AI1, AI2, AI3 or AIP, channel 1 reference is not copied.
• The reference copied is FrH (before ramp) unless the channel 2 reference is set via +/- speed. In this
case, the reference copied is rFr (after ramp)
- Copying the control and/or the reference may change the direction of rotation.
LCC Control via remote terminal nO

Parameter can only be accessed with the remote terminal option and if LAC = L1 or L2.
YES: Enables control of the drive using the STOP/RESET, RUN and FWD/REV buttons on the terminal.
The speed reference is then given by parameter LFr in the SEt- menu. Only the freewheel, fast stop and DC
injection stop commands remain active on the terminal block. If the drive/terminal connection is cut or if the
terminal has not been connected, the drive locks in an SLF fault.
PSt Stop priority YES
This function gives priority to the STOP key on the keypad (ATV31pppA only) or the STOP key on the remote
terminal, regardless of the control channel (terminal block or communication bus).
YES: STOP key priority
In order to change the assignment of PSt, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds.
rOt Direction of operation authorized dFr
Direction of operation authorized for the RUN key on the keypad (ATV31pppA only) or the RUN key on the
remote terminal.
dFr: Forward
drS: Reverse
bOt: Both directions are authorized (except for the keypad on the ATV31pppA: Forward only).
35
Control menu CtL-
CtL-
range
SCS Saving the configuration (1)
FCS Return to factory settings/Restore configuration

(1)
rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously saved by SCS
= StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS automatically changes to nO as soon as
this action has been performed.
of the 4 configurations that may be loaded on the remote terminal.
Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO, this means that the
configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive ratings for example). If
ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has switched to nO, this means that a
36
Application functions menu FUn-
ENT ENT ENT
FUn- ESC
rPC- ESC ESC
Sub-menu
ENT ENT
SA1- Sub-menu
ESC
ESC ESC
ENT
FCS
ESC
ESC
Some functions have numerous parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters, these
functions have been grouped in sub-menus.
Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code: PSS- for example.
There may be an incompatibility between functions (see the incompatibility table 13). In this case, the first function configured will
prevent the remainder being configured.
FUn-
range
rPC- Ramps
rPt Type of ramp LIn
Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration ramps.
LIn: Linear
S: S ramp
U: U ramp
CUS: Customized
S ramps

The curve coefficient is fixed,
with t2 = 0.6 x t1
with t1 = set ramp time.

U ramps

The curve coefficient is fixed,
with t2 = 0.5 x t1
with t1 = set ramp time.

Customized ramps

tA1: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of ACC or AC2)
tA2: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA1) (of ACC
or AC2)
tA3: Can be set between 0 and 100% (of dEC or dE2)

tA4: Can be set between 0 and (100% - tA3) (of dEC or
dE2)
tA1 Start of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded 0 to 100 10%

37
FUn-
range
rPC- tA2 End of CUS-type acceleration ramp rounded as 0 to (100-tA1) 10%
(continued) % of total ramp time (ACC or AC2)
tA3 Start of CUS-type deceleration ramp rounded 0 to 100 10%
tA4 End of CUS-type deceleration ramp 0 to (100-tA3) 10%
ACC Acceleration and deceleration ramp times (1) 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s
dEC 0.1 to 999.9 s 3s
Defined for accelerating and decelerating between 0 and the nominal frequency FrS
(parameter in the drC- menu).
rPS Ramp switching nO
This function remains active regardless of the control channel.
nO: Not assigned
Cd11: Bit 11 of the Modbus or CANopen control word

ACC and dEC are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0.
AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1.
Frt Ramp switching threshold 0 to 500 Hz 0
The second ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not equal to 0 (0 deactivates the function)
and the output frequency is greater than Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with switching via LI or bit as follows:
LI or bit Frequency Ramp
0 <Frt ACC, dEC
0 >Frt AC2, dE2
1 <Frt AC2, dE2
1 >Frt AC2, dE2
AC2 2nd acceleration ramp time (1): 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s

Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency
threshold (Frt).
dE2 2nd deceleration ramp time (1): 0.1 to 999.9 s 5s
Enabled via logic input (rPS) or frequency
threshold (Frt).
brA Deceleration ramp adaptation YES
Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at
too low a value for the inertia of the load.
YES: Function active. The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
• Positioning on a ramp
• The use of a braking resistor (no guarantee of the function operating correctly)
brA is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54).
(1) Parameter can also be accessed in the SEt- menu.
38
FUn-
range
StC- Stop modes
Stt Normal stop mode Stn
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.
rMP: On ramp
FSt: Fast stop
nSt: Freewheel stop
dCI: DC injection stop
FSt Fast stop via logic input nO
nO: Not assigned

The stop is activated when the logic state of the input changes to 0 and the control word
bit changes to 1. The fast stop is a stop on a reduced ramp via parameter dCF. If the input
falls back to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire
level control has been configured (tCC = 2C and tCt = LEL or PFO, see page 23). In other
cases, a new run command must be sent.
dCF Coefficient for dividing the deceleration ramp 0 to 10 4
time for fast stopping.
Ensure that the reduced ramp is not too low in relation to the load to be stopped.
The value 0 corresponds to the minimum ramp.
dCI DC injection via logic input nO
nO: Not assigned

Braking is activated when the logic state of the input or control word bit is at 1.
IdC Level of DC injection braking current activated 0 to In (2) 0.7 In (2)
via logic input or selected as stop mode (1)(3)
After 5 seconds the injection current is peak limited at 0.5 Ith if it is set at a higher value.
tdC Total DC injection braking time selected as 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
normal stop mode (1)(3)
(3) Caution: These settings are not related to the "automatic standstill DC injection" function.
39
FUn-
range
StC- nSt Freewheel stop via logic input nO
(continued) nO: Not assigned
The stop is activated when the input is in logic state 0. If the input falls back to state 1 and
the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if 2-wire level control has been
configured. In other cases, a new run command must be sent.
40
FUn-
range
AdC- Standstill DC injection
AdC Automatic standstill DC injection YES
(at the end of the ramp)
nO: No injection
YES: Standstill injection for adjustable period
Ct: Continuous standstill injection
This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not
been sent. It can be accessed with the drive running.
tdC1 Automatic standstill DC injection time (1) 0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
SdC1 Level of automatic standstill DC injection 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.7 In (2)
current (1)
nd
tdC2 2 automatic standstill DC injection time (1) 0 to 30 s 0s
SdC2 2nd level of standstill DC injection current (1) 0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.5 In (2)
AdC SdC2 Operation

YES x

Ct ≠0

Ct =0

Run command

Speed


41
FUn-
range
SAI- Summing inputs
SA2 Summing input 2 AI2
nO: Not assigned
AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only)

SA3 Summing input 3 nO
nO: Not assigned
AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only)

Summing inputs
Note:
.H
AI2 is an input ± 10 V, which can allow a subtraction by summing a
negative signal.
5)
5)!
See the complete diagrams on pages 28 and 30.
42
Preset speeds
2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively.
The following order of assignments must be observed: PS2, then PS4 then PS8, then PS16.
Combination table for preset speed inputs
16 speeds 8 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds Speed reference

LI (PS16) LI (PS8) LI (PS4) LI (PS2)
0 0 0 0 Reference (1)
0 0 0 1 SP2
0 0 1 0 SP3
0 0 1 1 SP4
0 1 0 0 SP5
0 1 0 1 SP6
0 1 1 0 SP7
0 1 1 1 SP8
1 0 0 0 SP9
1 0 0 1 SP10
1 0 1 0 SP11
1 0 1 1 SP12
1 1 0 0 SP13
1 1 0 1 SP14
1 1 1 0 SP15
1 1 1 1 SP16
(1) See the diagrams on page 28 and page 30: Reference 1 = (SP1).
43
FUn-
range
PSS- Preset speeds
PS2 2 preset speeds If tCC = 2C: LI3
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. If tCC = 3C: nO
nO: Not assigned If tCC = LOC: LI3

PS4 4 preset speeds If tCC = 2C: LI4
Selecting the assigned logic input activates the function. If tCC = 3C: nO
Check that PS2 has been assigned before assigning PS4. If tCC = LOC: LI4
nO: Not assigned


PS8 8 preset speeds nO
nO: Not assigned


44
FUn-
range
PS16 16 preset speeds nO
nO: Not assigned


SP2 2nd preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 10 Hz
rd
SP3 3 preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 15 Hz
SP4 4th preset speed (1) 0.0 to 500.0 Hz 20 Hz
45
FUn-
range
JOG- Jog operation
JOG Jog operation If tCC = 2C: nO
If tCC = 3C: LI4
If tCC = LOC: nO
nO: Not assigned
Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C)
Motor Ramp Ramp

frequency DEC/DE2 forced to 0.1 s
Reference
JGF reference
JGF reference
LI (JOG)

u 0.5 s
Forward

Reverse

JGF Jog operation reference (1) 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
46
+/- speed
The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (see page 33).
Two types of operation are available.
1 Use of single action buttons: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s).
The input assigned to the "+ speed" command increases the speed, the input assigned to the "- speed" command decreases the speed.
2 Use of double action buttons: Only one logic input assigned to "+ speed" is required.
+ speed/- speed with double action buttons:
Description: 1 button pressed twice for each direction of rotation. Each action closes a contact.
Released (- speed) 1st press 2nd press

(speed maintained) (+ speed)
Forward button – a a and b
Reverse button – c c and d
Example of wiring:
LI1: forward

LIx: reverse
LIy: + speed

Motor frequency
LSP
0
LSP
Forward
2nd press
b b
1st press
a a a a a a a
0
Reverse
2nd press
d
1st press
c c
0
This type of +/- speed is incompatible with 3-wire control.
Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by HSP (see page 16).
Note:
If the reference is switched via rFC (see page 34) from any reference channel to another with "+/- speed" the value of reference rFr (after
ramp) is copied at the same time. This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.
47
FUn-
range
UPd- +/- speed (motorized potentiometer)
The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 and UPdH or UPdt has been selected
(see page 33).
USP + speed nO
Can only be accessed for UPdt.
nO: Not assigned
dSP - speed nO
Can only be accessed for UPdt.
nO: Not assigned
Str Save reference nO
Associated with the "+/- speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
• When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM)
• When the mains supply or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM)
On the next start-up, the speed reference is the last reference saved.
nO: No save
rAN: Save to RAM
EEP: Save to EEPROM
48
PI regulator
Diagram
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PI feedback (measurement).

Restart error
threshold
Pr2 (wake-up) PIF
Pr4 Error rFC Ramps
Internal PIC inversion tLS
reference PII

.H0 H.H

Reference A
Pages 28 and Gains
30
Preset PI
Key:
PIF references
FbS Parameter:
PI The black square
feedback represents the factory
setting assignment

Reference B
Pages 28 and 30
PI feedback:
The PI feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs (AI1, AI2 or AI3).
PI reference:
The PI reference can be assigned to the following parameters in order of priority:
- Preset references via logic inputs (rP2, rP3, rP4)
- Internal reference (rPI)
- Reference Fr1 (see page 33)
Combination table for preset PI references
LI (Pr4) LI (Pr2) Pr2 = nO Reference

rPI or Fr1
0 0 rPI or Fr1
0 1 rP2
1 0 rP3
1 1 rP4
Parameters which can be accessed in the settings menu (SEt-):

• Internal reference (rPI)
• Preset references (rP2, rP3, rP4)
• Regulator proportional gain (rPG)
• Regulator integral gain (rIG)
• FbS parameter:
The FbS parameter can be used to scale the reference on the basis of the variation range of the PI feedback (sensor rating).
E.g.: Pressure control
PI reference (process) 0 - 5 bar (0 - 100%)
Rating of pressure sensor 0 - 10 bar
FbS = Max. sensor scale/Max. process
FbS = 10/5= 2
• rSL parameter:
Can be used to set the PI error threshold above which the PI regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the max. time
threshold being exceeded at low speed (tLS).
• Reversal of the direction of correction (PIC): If PIC = nO, the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive, for example:
pressure control with a compressor. If PIC = YES, the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive, for example:
temperature control via a cooling fan.
49
"Manual - Automatic" operation with PI

This function combines the PI regulator and the switching of reference rFC (page 34). The speed reference is given by Fr2 or by the PI
function, depending on the state of the logic input.
Setting up the PI regulator

1 Configuration in PI mode
See the diagram on page 49.
2 Perform a test in factory settings mode (in most cases, this will be sufficient).
To optimize the drive, adjust rPG or rIG gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PI feedback in relation to the reference.
3 If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect:
Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode (without PI regulator) and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system:
- In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PI feedback signal must be stable.
- In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly and the PI feedback must follow the speed.
If this is not the case, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and cabling.
Switch to PI mode.
Set brA to no (no auto-adaptation of the ramp).
Set the speed ramps (ACC, dEC) to the minimum permitted by the mechanics without triggering an ObF fault.
Set the integral gain (rIG) to minimum.
Observe the PI feedback and the reference.
Do several RUN/STOP or vary the load or reference rapidly.
Set the proportional gain (rPG) in order to ascertain the ideal compromise between response time and stability in transient phases (slight
overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing).
If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain (rIG), reduce the proportional gain (rPG)
in the event of instability (pump applications), find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram).
Perform in-production tests throughout the reference range.
Stabilization time
Regulated
value rPG high
Overshoot
Reference Static error
Proportional
gain
rPG low
Rise time
time
rIG high
Reference
Integral
gain
rIG low
time
Reference
rPG and rIG correct
time
The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics.
Stabilization
Parameter Rise time Overshoot Static error
time
rPG
=
rIG
50
FUn-
range
PI- PI regulator
PIF PI regulator feedback nO
nO: Not assigned
rPG PI regulator proportional gain (1) 0.01 to 100 1
Contributes to dynamic performance during rapid changes in the PI feedback.
rIG PI regulator integral gain (1) 0.01 to 100 1
Contributes to static precision during slow changes in the PI feedback.
FbS PI feedback multiplication coefficient (1) 0.1 to 100 1
For process adaptation
PIC Reversal of the direction of correction of the PI nO
regulator (1)
nO: normal
YES: reverse
Pr2 2 preset PI references nO
nO: Not assigned
Pr4 4 preset PI references nO
Check that Pr2 has been assigned before assigning Pr4.
nO: Not assigned
rP2 2nd preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 30%
Only appears if Pr2 has been enabled by selecting an input.
rP3 3rd preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 60%
rP4 4th preset PI reference (1) 0 to 100% 90%

51
FUn-
range
PI- rSL Restart error threshold ("wake-up" threshold) 0 to 100% 0
(continued) If the "PI" and "Low speed operating time"(tLS) (see page 18) functions are configured at
the same time, the PI regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP.
This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting, operating at low speed
then stopping, and so on...
Parameter rSL (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PI error threshold
for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP.
The function is inactive if tLS = 0.
PII Internal PI regulator reference nO
nO: The PI regulator reference is Fr1, except for UPdH and UPdt (+/- speed cannot be
used as the PI regulator reference).
YES: The PI regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI.
rPI Internal PI regulator reference (1) 0 to 100% 0
52
Brake control
The function can only be accessed if LAC = L2 or L3 (page 28).
This function, which can be assigned to relay R2 or to logic output AOC, enables the drive to manage an electromagnetic brake.
Principle:
Synchronize brake release with the build-up of torque during start-up and brake engage at zero speed on stopping, to prevent jolting.
Brake sequence
Motor speed
Speed reference
t
0
Relay R2 or logic output AOC 1
t
0
Motor current
brt
Ibr
0 t
Motor frequency
bEt
Speed reference
brL
bEn
0 t
LI forward or reverse
1
0 t
Brake status Engaged Released Engaged
Settings which can be accessed in the FUn- menu:

- Brake release frequency (brL)
- Brake release current (Ibr)
- Brake release time (brt)
- Brake engage frequency (bEn)
- Brake engage time (bEt)
- Brake release pulse (bIP)
Recommended settings for brake control:

1 Brake release frequency:
- Horizontal movement: Set to 0.
- Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz.
2 Brake release current (Ibr):
- Vertical movement: Preset the nominal current of the motor then adjust it in order to prevent jolting on start-up, making sure that the
maximum load is held when the brake is released.
3 Brake release time (brt):
Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release.
4 Brake engage frequency (bEn)
- Vertical movement: Set to a frequency equal to the nominal slip of the motor in Hz. Caution: bEn maxi = LSP, you must therefore
first set LSP to a sufficient value.
5 Brake engage time (bEt):
Adjust according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage.
6 Brake release pulse:
- Horizontal movement: Set to nO.
- Vertical movement: Set to YES and check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the upward direction of
the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases. This parameter generates motor torque in an upward direction regardless of the
direction of operation commanded in order to maintain the load whilst the brake is releasing.
53
FUn-
range
bLC- Brake control
bLC Brake control configuration nO
nO: Not assigned
r2: Relay R2
dO: Logic output AOC
If bLC is assigned, parameter FLr (page 61) and brA (page 38) are forced to nO, and
parameter OPL (page 61) is forced to YES.
brL Brake release frequency 0.0 to 10.0 Hz According to drive
rating
Ibr Motor current threshold for brake release 0 to 1.36 In (1) According to drive
rating
brt Brake release time 0 to 5 s 0.5 s
LSP Low speed 0 to HSP (page 16) 0 Hz
Motor frequency at min. reference. This parameter can also be modified in the SEt- menu
(page 16).
bEn Brake engage frequency threshold nO - 0 to LSP nO
nO: Not adjusted
0 to LSP: Adjustment range (Hz)
If bLC is assigned and bEn remains equal to nO, the drive will lock on a bLF fault at the
first run command.
bEt Brake engage time 0 to 5 s 0.5 s
bIP Brake release pulse nO
nO: Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction corresponds to the direction
of rotation commanded.
YES: Whilst the brake is releasing, the motor torque direction is always forward,
regardless of the direction of operation commanded.
Check that the motor torque direction for "Forward" control corresponds to the
upward direction of the load. If necessary, reverse two motor phases.
54
FUn-
range
LC2- Switching for second current limit
LC2 Switching for second current limit nO
nO: Not assigned

CL1 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 0 (SEt- menu page 18).
CL2 is enabled when the logic input or control word bit is in state 1.
CL2 2nd current limit (1) 0.25 to 1.5 In (2) 1.5 In (2)

55
FUn-
range
CHP- Motor switching
CHP Switching, motor 2 nO
nO: Not assigned

- The motor switching function disables motor thermal protection. An external

means of motor thermal protection must therefore be provided.
- If you use this function, do not use the tUn auto-tuning function (page 21) on
motor 2 and do not configure tUn = rUn or POn.
- Changes to parameters are only taken into account when the drive is locked.
UnS2 Nominal motor voltage (motor 2) given on the According to drive According to drive
rating plate rating rating
ATV31pppM2: 100 to 240 V
ATV31pppM3X: 100 to 240 V
ATV31pppN4: 100 to 500 V
ATV31pppS6X: 100 to 600 V
FrS2 Nominal motor frequency (motor 2) given on 10 to 500 Hz 50 Hz
the rating plate
UnS (in volts)
The ratio must not exceed the following values
FrS (in Hz)
ATV31pppM2: 7 max.
ATV31pppM3X: 7 max.
ATV31pppN4: 14 max.
ATV31pppS6X: 17 max.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or 60 Hz if bFr is set to 60 Hz.
nCr2 Nominal motor current (motor 2) given on the 0.25 to 1.5 In (2) According to drive
rating plate rating
nSP2 Nominal motor speed (motor 2) given on the 0 to 32760 RPM According to drive
rating plate rating
If, rather than the nominal speed, the rating plate indicates the synchronous speed and the
slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the nominal speed as follows:
100 - slip as a %
• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
100
or
50 - slip in Hz
50
or
60 - slip in Hz
60

56
FUn-
range
CHP- COS2 Motor Cos Phi (motor 2) given on the rating 0.5 to 1
According to drive
(continued) plate rating
UFt2 Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio n
motor 2
L: Constant torque for motors connected in parallel or special motors
P: Variable torque: Pump and fan applications
n: Sensorless flux vector control for constant torque applications
nLd: Energy saving, for variable torque applications not requiring high dynamics
(behaves in a similar way to the P ratio at no load and the n ratio on load).
Voltage
UnS
L
n
P
FrS Frequency
UFr2 IR compensation/Voltage boost, motor 2 (1) 0 to 100% 20
For UFt2 = n or nLd: IR compensation. For UFt2 = L or P: Voltage boost.
Used to optimize the torque at very low speed (increase UFr2 if the torque is insufficient).
Check that the value of UFr2 is not too high for when the motor is warm (risk of instability).
Modifying UFt2 will cause UFr2 to return to the factory setting (20%).
FLG2 Frequency loop gain, motor 2 (1) 1 to 100% 20
Parameter can only be accessed if UFt2 = n or nLd.
The FLG2 parameter adjusts the drive’s ability to follow the speed ramp based on the
inertia of the machine being driven.
FLG2 low FLG2 correct FLG2 high
Hz Hz Hz
50 50 50
40 40 40
30
In this case, 30 30
In this case,
20 increase FLG2 20 20 reduce FLG2
10 10 10
0 0 0
-10 -10 -10
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
StA2 Frequency loop stability, motor 2 (1) 1 to 100% 20

Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient (acceleration or
deceleration), according to the dynamics of the machine.
StA2 low StA2 correct StA2 high
Hz Hz Hz
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 In this case, 30 30 In this case,
20 increase StA2 20 20 reduce StA2
10 10 10
0 0 0
-10 -10 -10
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t
SLP2 Slip compensation, motor 2 (1) 0 to 150% 100

• If slip setting < actual slip: the motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state.
• If slip setting > actual slip: the motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
57
Management of limit switch

It can be used to manage the operation of one or two limit switches (1 or 2 directions of operation):
- Assignment of one or two logic inputs (forward limit, reverse limit)
- Selection of the type of stop (on ramp, fast or freewheel)
Following a stop, the motor is permitted to restart in the opposite direction only.
- The stop is performed when the input is in state 0. The direction of operation is authorized in state 1.
FUn-
range
LSt- Management of limit switches
LAF Limit, forward direction nO
nO: Not assigned
LAr Limit, reverse direction nO
nO: Not assigned
LAS Type of limit switch stop nSt
rMP: On ramp
FSt: Fast stop
nSt: Freewheel stop
These parameters only appear if the function has been enabled via the selection of a logic input.
58
FUn-
SCS Saving the configuration (1) nO
StrI: Saves the current configuration (but not the result of auto-tuning) to EEPROM. SCS
automatically switches to nO as soon as the save has been performed. This function is used
to keep another configuration in reserve, in addition to the current configuration.
When drives leave the factory the current configuration and the backup configuration are both
initialized with the factory configuration.
• If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection
options will appear: FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4 (files available in the remote
terminal's EEPROM memory for saving the current configuration). They can be used to
store between 1 and 4 different configurations which can also be stored on or even
transferred to other drives of the same rating.
FCS Return to factory setting/restore configuration (1) nO
rECI: The current configuration becomes identical to the backup configuration previously
saved by SCS = StrI. rECI is only visible if the backup has been carried out. FCS
automatically changes to nO as soon as this action has been performed.
InI: The current configuration becomes identical to the factory setting. FCS automatically
• If the remote terminal option is connected to the drive, the following additional selection
options appear, as long as the corresponding files have been loaded in the remote
terminal's EEPROM memory (0 to 4 files): FIL1, FIL2, FIL3, FIL4. They
enable the current configuration to be replaced with one of the 4 configurations that may
be loaded on the remote terminal.
Caution: If nAd appears on the display briefly once FCS has switched to nO, this means
that the configuration transfer is not possible and has not been performed (different drive
ratings for example). If ntr appears on the display briefly once the parameter has
switched to nO, this means that a configuration transfer error has occurred and the factory
settings must be restored using InI.
For rECI, InI and FL1 to FL4 to be taken into account, the ENT key must be held down
for 2 s.
59
Fault menu FLt-
ENT
Atr
ESC
Automatic restart
FLt- ESC ENT
ESC
rPr
ESC ESC
Operating time reset to zero
ENT
FLt-
Atr Automatic restart nO
YES: Automatic restart, after locking on a fault, if the fault has disappeared and the other operating
conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by
increasingly longer waiting periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 min for the following periods.
If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and
the drive remains locked until it is powered down then powered up.
The following faults permit this function:
External fault (EPF)
Loss of 4-20 mA reference (LFF)
CANopen fault (COF)
System overvoltage (OSF)
Loss of a line phase (PHF)
Loss of a motor phase (OPF)
DC bus overvoltage (ObF)
Motor overload (OLF)
Serial link (SLF)
Drive overheating (OHF)
The drive safety relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating
direction must be maintained.
Use 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO (page 23).
Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way.
tAr Max. duration of restart process 5
5: 5 minutes
10: 10 minutes
30: 30 minutes
1h: 1 hour
2h: 2 hours
3h: 3 hours
Ct: Unlimited
This parameter appears if Atr = YES. It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent
fault.
rSF Reset of current fault no
nO: Not assigned
60
Fault menu FLt-
FLt-
FLr Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) nO
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
- Loss of line supply or disconnection
- Reset of current fault or automatic restart
- Freewheel stop
The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart, then
follows the ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire control (tCC = 2C) with tCt = LEL or PFO.
YES: Function active
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay
(1 second max.).
FLr is forced to nO if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54).
EtF External fault nO
nO: Not assigned

EPL Stop mode in the event of an external fault EPF YES
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with freewheel stop
rNP: Fault with stop on ramp
FSt: Fault with fast stop
OPL Configuration of motor phase loss fault YES
YES: Triggering of OPF fault
OAC: No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the
link with the motor is re-established and flying restart even if FLr = nO. To be used with downstream
contactor.
OPL is forced to YES if brake control (bLC) is assigned (page 54).
IPL Configuration of line phase loss fault YES
This parameter is only accessible on 3-phase drives.
nO: Fault ignored
YES: Fault with fast stop
OHL Stop mode in the event of a drive overheating fault OHF YES
nO: Fault ignored
OLL Stop mode in the event of a motor overload fault OLF YES
nO: Fault ignored
61
Fault menu FLt-
FLt-
range
SLL Stop mode in the event of a Modbus serial link fault SLF YES
nO: Fault ignored
COL Stop mode in the event of a CANopen serial link fault COF YES
nO: Fault ignored
tnL Configuration of auto-tuning fault tnF YES
nO: Fault ignored (the drive reverts to the factory settings)
YES: Fault with drive locked
LFL Stop mode in the event of a loss of 4 - 20 mA signal fault LFF nO
nO: Fault ignored (only value possible if CrL3 y 3 mA, see page 24)
LFF: The drive switches to the fallback speed (LFF parameter)
rLS: The drive maintains the speed at which it was travelling when the fault occurred until the fault has
disappeared.
Before setting LFL to YES , rMP or FSt, check the connection of input AI3. Otherwise, the drive may
immediately switch to an LFF fault.
LFF Fallback speed 0 to 500 Hz 10 Hz
Fallback speed setting for stopping in the event of a fault
drn Derated operation in the event of an overvoltage nO
YES: The line voltage monitoring threshold is:
ATV31pppM2: 130 V
ATV31pppM3X: 130 V
ATV31pppN4: 270 V
ATV31pppS6X: 340 V
In this case, a line choke must be used and the performance of the drive cannot be guaranteed.
In order to assign this function, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds.
StP Controlled stop on mains power break nO
nO: Locking of the drive and freewheel stopping of the motor
NNS: This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the drive power supply as long as possible.
rNP: Stop according to the valid ramp (dEC or dE2)
FSt: Fast stop, the stopping time depends on the inertia and the braking ability of the drive.
InH Fault inhibit nO
Inhibiting faults may damage the drive beyond repair. This would invalidate the guarantee.
nO: Not assigned

Fault monitoring is active when the input is in state 0.

It is inactive when the input is in state 1.
All active faults are reset on a rising edge (from 1 to 0) of the input.
In order to assign this function, you must press and hold down the "ENT" key for 2 seconds.
rPr Operating time reset to zero nO
nO: No
rtH: Operating time reset to zero
The rPr parameter automatically falls back to nO as soon as the reset to zero is performed.
62
Communication menu COM-
ENT
Add
ESC
CON- ESC ENT
ESC
FLOC
ESC ESC
ENT
The parameters can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present. Modifications to parameters
Add, tbr, tFO, AdCO and bdCO are only taken into account following a restart.
CON-
range
Add Modbus: Drive address 1 to 247 1
tbr Modbus: Transmission speed 19200
4.8: 4800 bps
9.6: 9600 bps
19.2: 19200 bps (Caution: The remote terminal can only be used with this value.)
tFO Modbus communication format 8E1
8O1: 8 data bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
8E1: 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit (Caution: The remote terminal can only be used with this value.)
8n1: 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
8n2: 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
ttO Modbus: Time-out 0.1 to 10 s 10 s
AdCO CANopen: Drive address 0 to 127 0
bdCO CANopen: Transmission speed 125
10.0: 10 kbps
20.0: 20 kbps
50.0: 50 kbps
125.0: 125 kbps
250.0: 250 kbps
500.0: 500 kbps
1000: 1000 kbps
ErCO CANopen: Error registry (read-only)
0: "No error"
1: "Bus off error"
2: "Life time error"
3: "CAN overrun"
4: "Heartbeat error"
FLO Forced local mode nO
nO: Not assigned
In forced local mode, the terminal block and display terminal regain control of the drive.
FLOC Selection of the reference and control channel in forced local AI1
mode AIP for
Can only be accessed if LAC = 3 ATV31pppA
In forced local mode, only the speed reference is taken into account. PI functions, summing inputs, etc. are
not active.
See the diagrams on pages 28 to 31.
AI1: Analog input AI1, logic inputs LI
AIP: Potentiometer (type A drives only), RUN/STOP buttons
LCC: Remote terminal: LFr reference page 16, RUN/STOP/FWD/REV buttons.
63
Display menu SUP-
ENT ENT
SUP- ESC
LFr ESC
ESC
ENT ENT
LIA- Sub-menu
ESC
ESC ESC
ENT
CPU
ESC
ESC
Parameters can be accessed with the drive running or stopped.

On the optional remote terminal, this menu can be accessed with the switch in any position.
Some functions have numerous parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through endless parameters, these
functions have been grouped in sub-menus.
Like menus, sub-menus are identified by a dash after their code: LIA- for example.
When the drive is running, the value displayed is that of one of the monitoring parameters. By default, the value displayed is the output
frequency applied to the motor (rFr parameter).
Whilst the value of the new monitoring parameter required is being displayed, press and hold down the "ENT" key (2 seconds) to confirm
the change of monitoring parameter and store this. From now on, the value of this parameter will be displayed while the drive is running
(even after it has been disconnected).
If the new choice is not confirmed by pressing the "ENT" key a second time, the drive will return to the previous parameter after it has been
switched off.
64
Display menu SUP-
SUP-
Code Description Variation range
LFr Frequency reference for control via built-in 0 to 500 Hz
terminal or remote terminal
rPI Internal PI reference 0 to 100%
FrH Frequency reference before ramp (absolute 0 to 500 Hz
value)
rFr Output frequency applied to the motor - 500 Hz to + 500 Hz
SPd1
or
SPd2 Output value in customer units
or SPd1 or SPd2 or SPd3 depending on the SdS parameter, see page 19 (SPd3 in factory
SPd3 settings mode).
LCr Current in the motor
Opr Motor power
100% = Nominal motor power, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu.
ULn Line voltage (gives the line voltage via the DC bus, motor running or stopped)
tHr Motor thermal state
118% = "OLF" threshold (motor overload)
tHd Drive thermal state
118% = "OHF" threshold (motor overload)
LFt Last fault
bLF: Brake control fault
CFF: Configuration (parameters) incorrect
CFI: Configuration (parameters) invalid
COF: Communication fault line 2 (CANopen)
CrF: Capacitor pre-charge fault
EEF: EEPROM memory fault
EPF: External fault
InF: Internal fault
LFF: 4 - 20 mA fault on AI3
nOF: No fault saved
ObF: DC bus overvoltage fault
OCF: Overcurrent fault
OHF: Drive overheating fault
OLF: Motor overload fault
OPF: Motor phase loss fault
OSF: Line supply overvoltage fault
PHF: Line supply phase loss fault
SCF: Motor short-circuit fault (phase, earth)
SLF: Modbus communication fault
SOF: Motor overspeed fault
tnF: Auto-tuning fault
USF: Line supply undervoltage fault
Otr Motor torque
100% = Nominal motor torque, calculated using the parameters entered in the drC- menu.
rtH Operating time 0 to 65530 hours
Total time the motor has been powered up:
0 to 9999 (hours), then 10.00 to 65.53 (kilo-hours).
Can be reset to zero by the rPr parameter in the FLt- menu (see page 62).
65
Display menu SUP-
SUP-
Code Description
COd Terminal locking code
Caution: Before entering a code, do not forget to make a careful note of it.
• 0FF: No access locking codes

- To lock access, enter a code (2 to 9999). The display can be incremented using .
Now press "ENT". "On" appears on the screen to indicate that the parameters have
been locked.
• On: A code is locking access (2 to 9999)
- To unlock access, enter the code (incrementing the display using ) and press
"ENT". The code remains on the display and access is unlocked until the next power
down. Parameter access will be locked again on the next power-up.
- If an incorrect code is entered, the display changes to "On" and the parameters
remain locked.
• XXXX: Parameter access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen).
- To reactivate locking with the same code when the parameters have been
unlocked, return to "On" using the button then press "ENT". "On" appears on the
screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked.
- To lock access with a new code when the parameters have been unlocked, enter a
new code (increment the display using or ) and press "ENT". "On" appears on
the screen to indicate that the parameters have been locked.
- To clear locking when the parameters have been unlocked, return to "OFF" using the
button and press "ENT". "OFF" remains on the screen. The parameters are
unlocked and will remain unlocked until the next restart.
When access is locked using a code, only the monitoring parameters can be accessed,
with only a temporary choice of parameter displayed.
tUS State of auto-tuning
tAb: The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor.
PEnd: Auto-tuning has been requested but not yet performed.
PrOG: Auto-tuning in progress.
FAIL: Auto-tuning has failed.
dOnE: The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to manage
the drive.
Strd: The cold stator resistance (rSC other than nO) that is used to control the motor.
UdP Indicates the ATV31 firmware version.
E.g.: 1102 = V1.1 IE02.
LIA- Logic input functions
LI1A Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been
LI2A assigned, nO is displayed. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If
LI3A a number of functions have been assigned to the same input, check that they are
LI4A compatible.
LI5A
LI6A
LIS Can be used to display the state of the logic inputs (using the segments of the display:
high = 1, low = 0)
State 1
State 0
LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6
Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1, LI2 to LI5 are at 0.
AIA- Analog input functions
AI1A Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input. If no functions have been
AI2A assigned, nO is displayed. Use the and arrows to scroll through the functions. If
AI3A a number of functions have been assigned to the same input, check that they are
compatible.
66
Maintenance
Servicing
The Altivar 31 does not require any preventative maintenance. It is nevertheless advisable to perform the following regularly:
• Check the condition and tightness of connections.
• Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective (average service life of fans:
3 to 5 years depending on the operating conditions).
• Remove any dust from the drive.
Assistance with maintenance, fault display

If a problem arises during setup or operation, ensure that the recommendations relating to the environment, mounting and connections have
been observed.
The first fault detected is stored and displayed, flashing, on the screen: the drive locks and the fault relay (RA - RC) contact opens, if it has
been configured for this function.
Clearing the fault

Cut the power supply to the drive in the event of a non-resettable fault.
Wait for the display to go off completely.
Find the cause of the fault in order to correct it.
The drive is unlocked after a fault by:

• Switching off the drive until the display disappears completely, then switching on again
• Automatically in the cases described in the "automatic restart" function (FLt- menu, Atr = YES)
• Via a logic input when this input is assigned to the "fault reset" function (FLt- menu, rSF = LIp)
Monitoring menu:
This is used to prevent and find the causes of faults by displaying the drive status and its current values.
Spares and repairs:

Consult Schneider Electric product support.
67
Faults - Causes - Remedies
Drive does not start, no fault displayed

• If the display does not light up, check the power supply to the drive.
• The assignment of the "Fast stop" or "Freewheel stop" functions will prevent the drive from starting if the corresponding logic inputs are
not powered up. The ATV31 then displays "nSt" in freewheel stop mode and "FSt" in fast stop mode. This is normal since these functions
are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped safely if there is a wire break.
• Check that the run command input(s) have been actuated in accordance with the chosen control mode (tCC parameter in the I-O- menu).
• If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero, the drive can only be started up by sending a command for the
opposite direction (see page 58).
• If the reference channel (page 28) or the control channel (page 29) is assigned to Modbus or CANopen, the drive displays nSt on
power-up and remains at stop until the communication bus sends a command.
Faults which cannot be reset automatically

The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by switching off and then on again.
CrF, SOF, tnF, bLF and OPF faults can also be reset remotely via logic input (rSF parameter in the FLt- menu page 60).
Fault Probable cause Remedy

bLF • Brake release current not reached • Check the drive/motor connection.
Brake sequence • Check the motor windings.
• Check the Ibr setting in the FUn- menu (see page 54).
• Brake engage frequency bEn = • Carry out the recommended adjustment of bEn (see pages 53 and 54).
nO (not adjusted) when brake
logic bLC is assigned.
CrF • Load relay control fault or • Replace the drive.
Capacitor load circuit charging resistor damaged
EEF • Internal memory fault • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
EEPROM fault • Replace the drive.
InF • Internal fault • Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
Internal fault • Replace the drive.
OCF • Incorrect parameters in the SEt- • Check the SEt- and drC- parameters.
Overcurrent and drC- menus • Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Inertia or load too high • Check the state of the mechanism.
• Mechanical blockage
SCF • Short-circuit or earthing at the • Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor
Motor short-circuit drive output insulation.
• Significant earth leakage current at • Reduce the switching frequency.
the drive output when several • Connect chokes in series with the motor.
motors are connected in parallel
SOF • Instability or • Check the motor, gain and stability parameters.
Overspeed • Driving load too high • Add a braking resistor.
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
tnF • Special motor or motor whose • Use the L or the P ratio (see Uft page 21).
Auto-tuning fault power is not suitable for the drive • Check the presence of the motor during auto-tuning.
• Motor not connected to the drive • If a downstream contactor is being used, close it during auto-tuning.
68
Faults - Causes - Remedies
Faults which can be reset with the automatic restart function, after the cause has disappeared
These faults can also be reset by switching the drive off and on again or via a logic input (rSF parameter in the FLt- menu page 60)

COF • Interruption in communication on • Check the communication bus.
CAnopen fault the CANopen bus • Please refer to the product-specific documentation.
EPF • According to user • According to user
External fault
LFF • Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on • Check the connection on input AI3.
Loss of 4-20mA input AI3
ObF • Braking too sudden • Increase the deceleration time.
Overvoltage or driving load • Install a braking resistor if necessary.
during deceleration • Activate the brA function (page 38) if it is compatible with the
application.
OHF • Drive temperature too high • Check the motor load, the drive ventilation and the
Drive overheated environment. Wait for the drive to cool down before
restarting.
OLF • Triggered by excessive motor • Check the ItH setting (motor thermal protection) (page 16),
Motor overload current check the motor load. Wait for the drive to cool down before
restarting.
OPF • Loss of one phase at drive output • Check the connections from the drive to the motor.
Motor phase loss • Downstream contactor open • If a downstream contactor is being used, set OPL to OAC
• Motor not connected or motor (FLt- menu page 61).
power too low • Test on a low power motor or without a motor: In factory
• Instantaneous instability in the settings mode, motor phase loss detection is active (OPL =
motor current YES). To check the drive in a test or maintenance
environment without having to switch to a motor with the
same rating as the drive (particularly useful in the case of
high power drives), deactivate motor phase loss detection
(OPL = no).
• Check and optimize the UFr (page 17), UnS and nCr (page
20) parameters and perform auto-tuning with tUn (page 21).
OSF • Line voltage too high • Check the line voltage.
Overvoltage • Disturbed line supply
PHF • Drive incorrectly supplied or a • Check the power connection and the fuses.
Line phase failure fuse blown
• Failure of one phase • Reset.
• 3-phase ATV31 used on a single • Use a 3-phase line supply.
phase line supply
• Unbalanced load • Disable the fault by setting IPL = nO (FLt- menu page 61).
This protection only operates with
the drive on load.
SLF • Interruption in communication on • Check the communication bus.
Modbus fault the Modbus bus • Please refer to the product-specific documentation.
Faults which can be reset as soon as their cause disappears

CFF • The current configuration is • Return to factory settings or call up the backup
Configuration fault inconsistent. configuration, if it is valid. See the FCS parameter in the
I-O-, drC-, CtL- or FUn- menu.
CFI • Invalid configuration • Check the configuration loaded previously.
Configuration fault via serial link The configuration loaded in the • Load a consistent configuration.
drive via the serial link is
inconsistent.
USF • Line supply too low • Check the voltage and the voltage parameter.
Undervoltage • Transient voltage dip
• Damaged load resistor • Replace the drive.
69
Configuration/Settings table
Drive ATV 31...............................................................................................................................................................................................

Customer ID no. (if applicable)..........................................................................................................................................................................
1st level adjustment parameter
>.H
Code Factory setting Customer setting
bFr 50
Settings menu SEt-

Code Factory setting Customer setting Code Factory setting Customer setting
ACC 3s s rP2 30% %
AC2 5s s rP3 60% %
dE2 5s s rP4 90% %
dEC 3s s SP2 10 Hz Hz
tA1 10% % SP3 15 Hz Hz
tA2 10% % SP4 20 Hz Hz
tA3 10% % SP5 25 Hz Hz
tA4 10% % SP6 30 Hz Hz
LSP 0 Hz Hz SP7 35 Hz Hz
HSP bFr Hz SP8 40 Hz Hz
ItH According to drive rating A SP9 45 Hz Hz
UFr 20% % SP10 50 Hz Hz
FLG 20% % SP11 55 HZ Hz
StA 20% % SP12 60 Hz Hz
SLP 100 Hz % SP13 70 Hz Hz
IdC 0.7 In (1) A SP14 80 Hz Hz
tdC 0.5 s s SP15 90 Hz Hz
tdC1 0.5 s s SP16 100 Hz Hz
SdC1 0.7 In (1) A CLI 1.5 In (1) A
tdC2 0s s CL2 1.5 In (1) A
SdC2 0.5 In (1) A tLS 0 (no time limit) s
JPF 0 Hz Hz rSL 0
JF2 0 Hz Hz UFr2 20% %
JGF 10 Hz Hz FLG2 20% %
rPG 1 StA2 20% %
rIG 1/s /s SLP2 100% %
FbS 1 Ftd bFr Hz
PIC nO ttd 100% %
Ctd In (1) A
SdS 30
SFr 4 kHz kHz
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. The majority can also be
accessed and adjusted in the function configuration menu.
70

bFr 50 Hz Hz tUS tAb
UnS According to drive rating V UFt n
FrS 50 Hz Hz nrd YES
nCr According to drive rating A SFr 4 kHz kHz
nSP According to drive rating RPM tFr 60 Hz Hz
COS According to drive rating SrF nO
rSC nO
I/O menu I-O-

tCC 2C AO1t 0A
ATV31pppA: LOC
tCt trn dO nO
rrS if tCC = 2C, LI2 r1 FLt
if tCC = 3C, LI3
if tCC = LOC: nO
CrL3 4 mA mA r2 nO
CrH3 20 mA mA
Control menu CtL-

LAC L1 Cd2 Mdb
Fr1 AI1 CCS Cd1
AIP for ATV31pppA
Fr2 nO COp nO
rFC Fr1 LCC nO
CHCF SIM PSt YES
Cd1 tEr rOt dFr
LOC for ATV31pppA
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled.
71

rPC- rPt LIn JOG- JOG If tCC = 2C: nO
If tCC = 3C: LI4
If tCC = LOC: nO
tA1 10% % JGF 10 Hz Hz
tA2 10% % UPd- USP nO
tA3 10% % dSP nO
tA4 10% % Str nO
ACC 3s s PI- PIF nO
dEC 3s s rPG 1
rPS nO rIG 1
Frt 0 Hz FbS 1
AC2 5s s PIC nO
dE2 5s s Pr2 nO
brA YES Pr4 nO
StC- Stt Stn rP2 30% %
FSt nO rP3 60% %
dCF 4 rP4 90% %
dCI nO rSL 0
IdC 0.7 In A PII nO
tdC 0.5 s s rPI 0% %
nSt nO bLC- bLC nO
AdC- AdC YES brL According to drive Hz
tdC1 0.5 s s Ibr rating A
SdC1 0.7 In (1) A brt 0.5 s s
tdC2 0s s bEn nO Hz
SdC2 0.5 In (1) A bEt 0.5 s s
SAI- SA2 AI2 bIP nO
SA3 nO LC2- LC2 nO
PSS- PS2 If tCC = 2C: LI3 CL2 1.5 In (1) A
If tCC = 3C: LI4
If tCC = LOC: LI3
PS4 If tCC = 2C: LI4 CHP- CHP nO
If tCC = 3C: nO
If tCC = LOC: LI4
PS8 nO UnS2 According to drive V
rating
PS16 nO FrS2 50 Hz Hz
SP2 10 Hz Hz nCr2 A
SP3 15 Hz Hz nSP2 According to drive RPM
rating
SP4 20 Hz Hz COS2
SP5 25 Hz Hz UFt2 n
SP6 30 Hz Hz UFr2 20% %
SP7 35 Hz Hz FLG2 20% %
SP8 40 Hz Hz StA2 20% %
SP9 45 Hz Hz SLP2 100 Hz Hz
SP10 50 Hz Hz LSt- LAF nO
SP11 55 Hz Hz LAr nO
SP12 60 Hz Hz LAS nSt
SP13 70 Hz Hz
SP14 80 Hz Hz (1) In corresponds to the nominal drive current indicated in the
Installation Manual and on the drive rating plate.
SP15 90 Hz Hz
These parameters only appear if the
SP16 100 Hz Hz corresponding function has been enabled. They
can also be accessed in the SEt menu.
72
Fault menu FLt-

Atr nO SLL YES
tAr 5 COL YES
rSF nO tnL YES
FLr nO LFL nO
EtF nO LFF 10 Hz Hz
EPL YES drn nO
OPL YES StP nO
IPL YES InH nO
OHL YES rPr nO
OLL YES
Communication menu CON-

Add 1 bdCO 125
tbr 19200 FLO nO
tFO 8E1 FLOC AI1
ttO 10 s s AIP for ATV31pppA
AdCO 0
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been enabled.
73
Index of parameter codes
AC2 38 FLOC 63 Opr 65 SP2 45

ACC 38 FLr 61 Otr 65 SP3 45
AdC 41 Fr1 33 PIC 51 SP4 45
AdCO 63 Fr2 33 PIF 51 SP5 45
Add 63 FrH 65 Pr2 51 SP6 45
AI1A 66 FrS 20 Pr4 51 SP7 45
AI2A 66 FrS2 56 PS16 45 SP8 45
AI3A 66 Frt 38 PS2 44 SP9 45
AO1t 24 FSt 39 PS4 44 SPd1 65
Atr 60 Ftd 19 PS8 44 SPd2 65
bdCO 63 HSP 16 PSt 35 SPd3 65
bEn 54 Ibr 54 r1 24 SrF 22
bEt 54 IdC 39 r2 24 StA 17
bFr 20 InH 62 rFC 34 StA2 57
bIP 54 IPL 61 rFr 65 StP 62
bLC 54 ItH 16 rIG 51 Str 48
brA 38 JF2 18 rOt 35 Stt 39
brL 54 JGF 46 rP2 51 tA1 37
brt 54 JOG 46 rP3 51 tA2 38
CCS 35 JPF 18 rP4 51 tA3 38
Cd1 34 LAC 33 rPG 51 tA4 38
Cd2 34 LAF 58 rPI 52 tAr 60
CHCF 34 LAr 58 rPI 65 tbr 63
CHP 56 LAS 58 rPr 62 tCC 23
CL2 55 LC2 55 rPS 38 tCt 23
CLI 18 LCC 35 rPt 37 tdC 39
COd 66 LCr 65 rrS 23 tdC1 41
COp 35 LFF 62 rSC 21 tdC2 41
COS 20 LFL 62 rSF 60 tFr 22
COS2 57 LFr 65 rSL 52 tHd 65
CrH3 24 LFt 65 rtH 65 tHr 65
CrL3 24 LI1A 66 SA2 42 tLS 18
Ctd 19 LI2A 66 SA3 42 ttd 19
dCF 39 LI3A 66 SCS 22 ttO 63
dCI 39 LI4A 66 SdC1 41 tUn 21
dE2 38 LI5A 66 SdC2 41 tUS 21
dEC 16 LI6A 66 SdS 19 tUS 66
dO 24 LIS 66 SFr 22 UdP 66
drn 62 LSP 16 SLL 62 UFr 17
dSP 48 nCr 20 SLP 17 UFr2 57
EPL 61 nCr2 56 SLP2 57 UFt 21
ErCO 63 nrd 22 SP10 45 UFt2 57
EtF 61 nSP 20 SP11 45 ULn 65
FbS 51 nSP2 56 SP12 45 UnS 20
FCS 22 nSt 40 SP13 45 UnS2 56
FLG 17 OHL 61 SP14 45 USP 48
FLG2 57 OLL 61 SP15 45
FLO 63 OPL 61 SP16 45
74
Index of functions
+/- speed 47
2-wire/3-wire control 23
Analog/logic output AOC/AOV 24
Automatic restart 60
Automatic standstill DC injection 41
Brake control 53
CANopen: Drive address 63
Control and reference channels 26
Control channel switching 35
Current limit 18
DC injection via logic input 39
Deceleration ramp adaptation 38
Drive thermal protection 5
Drive ventilation 5
Fast stop via logic input 39
Flying restart (automatic catching a spinning load on ramp) 61
Forced local mode 63
Freewheel stop via logic input 40
Function access level 33
Jog operation 46
Management of limit switch 58
Modbus: Drive address 63
Motor control auto-tuning 21
Motor switching 56
Motor thermal protection 6
Motor thermal protection - max. thermal current 16
PI regulator 49
Preset speeds 43
Ramp switching 38
Ramps 37
Reference switching 34
Relay r1 24
Relay r2 24
Reset of current fault 60
Return to factory settings/restore configuration 22
Saving the configuration 22
Selection of the type of voltage/frequency ratio 21
Skip frequency 18
Stop modes 39
Summing inputs 42
Switching for second current limit 55
Switching frequency 22
75
VVDED303042 EN atv31_programming manual_EN_V1
2003-09

Variador Schenider-Inverter - en PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Variador Schenider-Inverter - en PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Variable speed drives

For 3-phase asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW

b PowerSuite software workshop. . . . . . . . . . . pages 28 and 29

b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 30 and 35

b Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 36 and 37

b Mounting and installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 38 and 39

b Combinations for self-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . pages 40 to 43

b Schneider Electric worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages 60 to 65

Altivar 31 drives are available with a choice of two different human-machine

Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

Options and accessories

Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Customisable enclosed drive

Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Electromagnetic compatibility EMC

b Drive kit for power ratings y 4 kW 1

b Drive kit for power ratings u 5.5 kW 6

Drive kits are supplied with:

Options and accessories

Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

The Altivar 31 drive communicates with the following options:

The communication function provides access to the drive’s configuration,

The Altivar 31 can be connected to a remote terminal.

Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

PowerSuite software workshop

PowerSuite advanced dialogue solutions offer the following advantages:

See pages 28 and 29.

See pages 26 and 27.

See pages 26 and 27.

Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Prospective short-circuit For drives

Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Electrical characteristics (continued)

Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Torque characteristics (typical curves)

0 Connecting motors in parallel

Switching the motor at the drive output

t1: deceleration without ramp (freewheel)

Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Drives with heatsink (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

0.37 0.5 5.3 4.4 1 1 3.3 5 41 ATV 31H037M2 (6 ) 1.500

Presentation: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Customisable enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

0.37 0.5 5.3 4.4 1 1 3.3 5 41 ATV 31C037M2 6.300

0.75 1 8.9 7.5 1.8 1 4.8 7.2 60 ATV 31C075M2 6.300

1.5 2 15.8 13.3 3.2 1 8 12 90 ATV 31CU15M2 8.800

2.2 3 21.9 18.4 4.4 1 11 16.5 123 ATV 31CU22M2 10.700

0.75 1 3.6 2.7 2.4 5 2.3 3.5 41 ATV 31C075N4 8.800

1.1 1.5 4.9 3.7 3.2 5 3 4.5 48 ATV 31CU11N4 8.800

1.5 2 6.4 4.8 4.2 5 4.1 6.2 61 ATV 31CU15N4 8.800

2.2 3 8.9 6.7 5.9 5 5.5 8.3 79 ATV 31CU22N4 10.700

3 – 10.9 8.3 7.1 5 7.1 10.7 125 ATV 31CU30N4 10.700

4 5 13.9 10.6 9.2 5 9.5 14.3 150 ATV 31CU40N4 10.700

Ready-assembled enclosed drives (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

Presentation: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes: Functions:

Drive kit (frequency range from 0.5 to 500 Hz)

0.37 0.5 5.3 4.4 1 1 3.3 5 41 ATV 31K037M2 6.300

0.75 1 8.9 7.5 1.8 1 4.8 7.2 60 ATV 31K075M2 6.300

1.5 2 15.8 13.3 3.2 1 8 12 90 ATV 31KU15M2 8.800

3-phase supply voltage: 380…500 V (5) 50/60 Hz with integrated filters

0.75 1 3.6 2.7 2.4 5 2.3 3.5 41 ATV 31K075N4 8.800

1.1 1.5 4.9 3.7 3.2 5 3 4.5 48 ATV 31KU11N4 8.800